1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
161 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
162 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
163 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
164 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
168 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
169 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
170 \author 258250489 "eugen"
171 \author 274215730 "scott"
172 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
173 \author 1064312605 "Udi Fogiel"
174 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
175 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
186 by the \SpecialChar LyX
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
193 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
194 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
195 Documentation mailing list:
197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
199 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \begin_inset Newline newline
219 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
221 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
225 \begin_inset Note Note
228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
229 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
230 \begin_inset Newline newline
235 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
245 LatexCommand tableofcontents
252 \begin_layout Chapter
256 \begin_layout Section
257 What is \SpecialChar LyX
261 \begin_layout Standard
263 is a document preparation system.
264 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
267 business letters and proposals,
269 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
273 It is unlike most other
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
282 That means that when you type a section header,
284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 takes care of the typesetting for you;
314 so you deal only with concepts,
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
324 If you haven't read it yet,
330 \begin_layout Standard
335 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
338 the format of all of the manuals.
339 If you don't read it,
340 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
341 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
344 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 Like most applications,
352 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
353 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
354 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
359 This is not a bug or an oversight,
361 When you read a book,
362 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
363 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
364 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
369 The first case is large images.
370 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
371 left click on the image and use the option
382 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
384 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
389 menus and toolbar buttons,
390 have a look at Appendix
395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
397 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
405 \begin_layout Section
409 \begin_layout Standard
410 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
412 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
414 Just select the manual you want to read from the
421 \begin_layout Section
422 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
426 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
435 can be configured via the menu
437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
441 \begin_inset Index idx
446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
453 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
456 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
457 packages are available.
458 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
459 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
460 was installed on your system,
461 you might have some items that you installed locally,
463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
467 \begin_inset space \space{}
470 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
474 To force \SpecialChar LyX
475 to re-inspect your system use
477 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
481 \begin_inset Index idx
486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
487 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
493 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
494 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
497 \begin_layout Section
500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
502 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
509 \begin_layout Standard
510 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
511 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
513 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
514 or print your documents
518 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
519 Some \SpecialChar LyX
520 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
529 which can produce PDFs and the like.
532 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
537 every \SpecialChar LyX
538 document can still be output as plain text
539 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
546 \begin_layout Standard
547 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
549 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
553 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
554 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
557 \begin_layout Standard
558 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
559 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
560 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
562 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
570 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
577 \begin_inset Index idx
582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
583 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
591 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
602 \begin_layout Chapter
603 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
607 \begin_layout Section
608 Basic File Operations
609 \begin_inset Index idx
614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
623 \begin_layout Standard
628 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
631 \begin_layout Itemize
654 \begin_layout Itemize
671 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
677 \begin_layout Itemize
700 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
726 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
743 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
753 \begin_layout Itemize
776 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
811 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
815 \begin_layout Itemize
817 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
825 \begin_layout Itemize
839 \begin_layout Itemize
854 \begin_layout Standard
855 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
856 with a few minor differences.
859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
870 command lists the available templates.
871 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
873 and possibly propose text fragments
877 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
880 you would otherwise need to
881 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
887 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
891 They can be of use for certain classes,
892 especially those for writing letters (see section
897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
899 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
906 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
907 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
910 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
918 \begin_layout Standard
919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
952 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
953 to open a file or create a new one,
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
960 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
965 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
977 \begin_layout Standard
999 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
1001 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1004 people work on the same document at the same time.
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1009 If you plan to do this,
1010 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1012 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1017 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1018 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1020 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1022 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1028 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1037 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1050 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1070 will reload the document from disk.
1071 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1072 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1084 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1085 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1089 \begin_layout Section
1091 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1094 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1099 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1104 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1106 lays much stress on safety.
1107 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1108 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1110 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1112 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1113 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1114 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1117 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1118 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1119 does not simply make a backup file,
1120 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1121 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1122 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1123 \begin_inset space ~
1127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1129 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1134 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1137 \begin_layout Standard
1139 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1141 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1144 \begin_layout Subsection
1146 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1150 \begin_layout Standard
1152 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1155 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1157 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1171 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1176 in preferences (see section
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1183 reference "sec:Paths"
1192 then all backups are stored there.
1193 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1194 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1195 but also the path in their name,
1197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1211 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1216 \begin_layout Standard
1218 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1219 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1220 and you need to enable
1221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1228 in order to see them.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1233 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1234 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1235 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1237 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1240 \begin_layout Subsection
1242 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1246 \begin_layout Standard
1248 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1251 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1259 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1264 As opposed to the backup files,
1265 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1268 \begin_layout Standard
1270 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1271 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1290 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1296 with all changes saved.
1297 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1302 program crash or power outage),
1303 and this is when they might become useful.
1306 \begin_layout Subsection
1308 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1312 \begin_layout Standard
1314 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1316 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1317 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1318 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1319 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1322 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1325 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 myfile.lyx.emergency
1339 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1341 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1344 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1345 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1348 \begin_layout Subsection
1350 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1351 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1355 \begin_layout Standard
1357 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1358 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1359 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1361 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1364 keeps a copy of the old version,
1367 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1370 where <n> is the old format (e.
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1377 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1380 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1381 that is alongside the original document or,
1383 in the backup directory.
1386 \begin_layout Standard
1388 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1389 As with backup files,
1390 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1394 \begin_layout Subsection
1396 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1397 When to Use Which File?
1400 \begin_layout Standard
1402 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1403 Now why all these files?
1404 Because they have different purposes.
1408 \begin_layout Standard
1410 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1412 terminates unexpectedly,
1415 \begin_layout Enumerate
1417 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1418 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1420 This file has the latest changes,
1421 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1424 \begin_layout Enumerate
1426 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1427 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1434 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1436 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1437 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1439 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1442 \begin_layout Enumerate
1444 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1445 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1446 use the backup file.
1447 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1448 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1449 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1454 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1455 The fourth type of file,
1456 the backup file from old versions,
1457 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1460 \begin_layout Standard
1462 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1463 So much for the safety net.
1464 We hope you will not need it,
1466 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1467 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1472 \begin_layout Section
1473 Basic Editing Features
1474 \begin_inset Index idx
1479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1488 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1495 \begin_layout Standard
1496 Like most modern word processors,
1498 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1499 can move by character,
1502 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1503 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1504 editing features and how to access them.
1505 We will start with cut and paste.
1508 \begin_layout Standard
1509 As you might expect,
1514 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1515 along with various other editing features.
1516 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1520 \begin_layout Itemize
1526 \begin_inset Index idx
1531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1561 \begin_layout Itemize
1567 \begin_inset Index idx
1572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 \begin_inset Index idx
1613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1643 \begin_inset space ~
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1653 \begin_inset space ~
1659 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1667 \begin_inset space ~
1673 \begin_inset Index idx
1678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1708 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1718 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1725 The first three are self-explanatory.
1726 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1727 and other programs using
1749 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1754 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1755 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1756 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1757 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1761 \begin_inset space ~
1766 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1767 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1770 \begin_layout Standard
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1779 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1780 Possible formats include HTML,
1785 \begin_inset space ~
1792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1801 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1807 \begin_inset space \space{}
1810 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1817 \begin_inset space ~
1820 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1822 \begin_inset space ~
1826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1839 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1840 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1841 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1851 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1852 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1877 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1880 paste from the primary selection.
1881 This is normally the currently selected text.
1884 \begin_layout Standard
1887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1911 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1913 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1917 Once you have found a word or expression,
1921 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1926 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1974 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1978 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1995 arg "word-find-backward"
1998 shortcut) to search backwards
2002 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
2003 Even if you close the widget,
2013 arg "word-find-backward"
2016 will search further.
2021 \begin_layout Standard
2023 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2028 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2036 field and searches the next match.
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2047 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2049 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2051 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2057 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2059 the following options are available:
2062 \begin_layout Itemize
2065 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2077 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2080 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2081 If the toggle is set,
2083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2094 will not match the word
2095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2112 \begin_layout Itemize
2115 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2119 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2123 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2128 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2129 to only find complete words,
2131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2135 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2165 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2172 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2177 will limit search and replace,
2179 to the current cursor selection.
2182 \begin_layout Itemize
2185 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2190 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2191 without pressing the
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_layout Itemize
2204 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2209 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2210 If this is not checked,
2211 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2212 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2213 so you need to put it back manually.
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2217 \paragraph_spacing single
2219 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2220 The widget also has a
2224 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2225 hiding replace and options.
2228 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2230 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2235 button brings you back to the full size.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 \paragraph_spacing single
2242 also offers an advanced
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2249 \begin_inset space ~
2254 feature that is described in section
2255 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2261 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2269 \begin_layout Standard
2273 \begin_inset space \space{}
2277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2285 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2286 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2290 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2297 \begin_layout Standard
2301 arg "inset-select-all"
2304 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2305 When the cursor is inside an inset
2308 arg "inset-select-all"
2311 selects the content of the inset.
2315 arg "inset-select-all"
2318 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2322 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2325 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2328 \begin_layout Section
2330 \begin_inset Index idx
2335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2356 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2363 \begin_layout Standard
2364 If you make a mistake,
2365 you can easily recover from it.
2367 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2370 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2373 or the toolbar button
2380 If you accidentally undo too much,
2383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2386 or the toolbar button
2393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2404 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2407 \begin_layout Standard
2409 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2410 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2420 This is a consequence of the 100
2421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2424 step undo limit mentioned above.
2427 \begin_layout Standard
2436 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2438 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2439 but by blocks of text.
2442 \begin_layout Section
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2458 \begin_layout Standard
2459 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2462 \begin_layout Enumerate
2467 \begin_layout Itemize
2472 once anywhere in the edit window.
2473 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2477 \begin_layout Enumerate
2482 \begin_layout Itemize
2489 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2496 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2498 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2499 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2504 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2515 \begin_layout Enumerate
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2525 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2529 \begin_layout Section
2531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2533 name "sec:Navigating"
2538 \begin_inset Index idx
2543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2554 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2557 \begin_layout Itemize
2562 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2565 \begin_layout Itemize
2567 which is accessed either by the menu
2569 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2576 or by the toolbar button
2579 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2585 \begin_layout Itemize
2586 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2588 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2591 and use the same menu to return to them.
2592 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2599 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2604 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2605 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2607 \begin_inset space ~
2612 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2613 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2616 \begin_layout Standard
2621 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2625 \begin_layout Subsection
2627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2629 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2641 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Index idx
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2670 \begin_layout Standard
2671 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2673 labels and cross-references (see section
2674 \begin_inset space ~
2678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2680 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2687 or citations (see section
2688 \begin_inset space ~
2692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2694 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2700 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2705 For example with citations,
2706 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2714 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2716 if you are displaying the list of
2718 Labels and References
2720 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2721 you can enter the text
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2738 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2739 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2744 option keeps it in the current view state.
2745 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2749 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2750 \begin_inset space ~
2754 the subsections of sections
2755 \begin_inset space ~
2758 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2763 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2769 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2788 button refreshes the TOC (
2789 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2795 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2797 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2801 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2805 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2809 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2813 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2819 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2821 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2825 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2835 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2837 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2845 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2853 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2857 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2861 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2865 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2869 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2871 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2875 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2890 you can move section
2891 \begin_inset space ~
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2898 2.4 or after section
2899 \begin_inset space ~
2904 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2917 (or the corresponding key bindings
2925 ) you can change the level of sections.
2926 You can make section
2927 \begin_inset space ~
2931 \begin_inset space ~
2935 \begin_inset space ~
2941 \begin_layout Standard
2942 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2946 \begin_layout Subsection
2947 Horizontal Scrolling
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2965 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2984 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2985 \begin_inset space ~
2988 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2989 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2998 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 is used on a small tablet computer
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3004 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3016 \begin_inset space ~
3029 \begin_layout Itemize
3030 Math constructs with long command names
3033 \begin_layout Standard
3034 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3035 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3036 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3037 window so that table
3038 \begin_inset space ~
3042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3050 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3054 \begin_layout Standard
3055 \begin_inset Float table
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3072 Horizontal scrolling test.
3080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3082 \begin_inset Tabular
3083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3129 \begin_layout Section
3130 Input/Word Completion
3131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3138 \begin_inset Index idx
3143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 \begin_inset Index idx
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3188 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3189 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3192 \begin_layout Standard
3193 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3196 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3201 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3208 \begin_inset space ~
3212 \begin_inset space ~
3217 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3221 \begin_inset space ~
3226 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3227 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3230 \begin_inset space ~
3236 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3237 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3240 \begin_layout Standard
3242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3247 key to accept a proposed completion.
3248 If several completions are possible,
3249 a popup is opened showing them.
3250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3251 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3255 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3265 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3268 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3270 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3273 he special math option
3277 enables characters to be composed.
3279 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3282 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3287 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3290 you want to insert the character
3291 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3296 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3299 input the characters
3300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3312 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3314 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3318 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3320 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3325 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3327 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3330 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3332 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3334 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3337 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3342 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3344 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3348 's installation folder.
3350 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3351 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3357 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3362 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3363 In the example above,
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3402 \begin_layout Section
3404 \begin_inset Index idx
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 \begin_inset Index idx
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 \begin_layout Standard
3463 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3479 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3482 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3486 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3487 \begin_inset space ~
3491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3493 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3501 \begin_layout Standard
3506 \begin_inset space ~
3515 \begin_inset space ~
3540 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3544 \begin_layout Labeling
3545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3549 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3550 LatexCommand nomenclature
3552 description "Tabulator key"
3559 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3561 If you do not understand this,
3563 \begin_inset space ~
3567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3569 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3577 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3584 \begin_inset space ~
3588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3590 reference "subsec:Lists"
3599 If you are still confused,
3605 \begin_inset Newline newline
3613 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3614 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3617 \begin_layout Labeling
3618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3622 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3623 LatexCommand nomenclature
3625 description "Escape key"
3633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3642 to cancel operations.
3643 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3646 \begin_layout Labeling
3647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3652 These move the cursor,
3654 to the beginning and end of a line,
3655 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 There are three modifier keys:
3662 \begin_layout Labeling
3663 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3681 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3682 LatexCommand nomenclature
3684 description "Control key"
3689 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3693 \begin_layout Itemize
3703 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3706 \begin_layout Itemize
3716 it moves by words instead of characters.
3719 \begin_layout Itemize
3729 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3734 \begin_layout Labeling
3735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3754 LatexCommand nomenclature
3756 description "Shift key"
3761 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3764 \begin_layout Labeling
3765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3784 LatexCommand nomenclature
3786 description "Alt or Meta key"
3791 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3792 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3793 If you have both keys,
3794 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3799 \begin_inset Newline newline
3802 This key does many different things,
3803 but it also activates the
3805 menu accelerator keys
3808 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3809 it selects that menu item.
3813 \begin_layout Standard
3816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3822 \begin_inset space ~
3826 \begin_inset space ~
3832 \begin_inset space ~
3840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3880 manual lists all other things bound to the
3888 \begin_layout Standard
3889 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3890 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3891 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3893 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3894 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3895 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3912 followed by a capital
3919 \begin_layout Chapter
3922 \begin_inset Index idx
3927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Section
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3973 \begin_layout Subsection
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3978 Before you do anything else,
3979 before you ever start writing a document,
3980 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3981 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3986 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3987 and format the title of your document differently.
3990 \begin_layout Standard
3995 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3996 By setting the document class,
3997 you automatically select these properties,
3998 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3999 If you don't choose a document class,
4001 picks one for you by default.
4002 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4005 \begin_layout Subsection
4007 \begin_inset Index idx
4012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4031 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4038 \begin_layout Standard
4039 You can select a class using the
4041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 Select the class you want to use,
4069 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4076 \begin_layout Standard
4077 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4082 \begin_layout Description
4083 Article for basic articles
4086 \begin_layout Description
4087 Report for basic reports
4090 \begin_layout Description
4091 Book for writing a book
4094 \begin_layout Description
4095 Letter for US-style letters
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 There are also some non-standard classes,
4100 which \SpecialChar LyX
4101 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4103 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4104 distributions will include many of these.
4105 Here are some of the classes.
4106 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4108 Special Document Classes
4117 \begin_layout Description
4118 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4121 \begin_layout Description
4122 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4125 \begin_layout Description
4126 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4129 \begin_layout Description
4130 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4131 There are three article layouts available.
4132 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4133 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4134 All result-type statements (propositions,
4136 and so on) are sequenced together,
4139 and the like have their own sequence.
4141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4144 sequential numbering
4145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4148 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4149 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4150 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4151 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4154 \begin_layout Description
4155 Beamer Layout for presentations
4158 \begin_layout Description
4159 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4160 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4162 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4166 \begin_layout Description
4167 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4170 \begin_layout Description
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4175 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4178 \begin_layout Description
4179 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4182 \begin_layout Description
4183 Foils Used to make transparencies
4186 \begin_layout Description
4187 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4188 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4190 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4194 \begin_layout Description
4195 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4198 \begin_layout Description
4199 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4202 \begin_layout Description
4203 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4206 \begin_layout Description
4207 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4208 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4209 automatic print space calculation etc.
4210 (Is used by this document.)
4213 \begin_layout Description
4214 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4217 \begin_layout Description
4218 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4221 \begin_layout Description
4226 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4227 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4228 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4229 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4233 \begin_layout Description
4234 Slides Used to make transparencies
4237 \begin_layout Description
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4242 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4245 \begin_layout Description
4246 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4250 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4251 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4253 Special Document Classes
4261 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4269 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4307 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4308 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4314 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4321 are highly specialized.
4323 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4324 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4325 with a growing number.
4326 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4327 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4328 There are just too many of them.
4329 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4332 \begin_layout Standard
4333 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4342 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4343 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4345 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4348 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4355 manual for information on how to install them.
4356 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4364 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4365 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4367 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4368 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4369 The \SpecialChar LyX
4370 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4373 users can write their own layout files,
4374 and many users have done so.
4377 Installing New Document Classes,
4385 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4392 name "subsec:Modules"
4397 \begin_inset Index idx
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4422 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4423 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4424 This is not available in any document class,
4425 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4460 \begin_layout Standard
4461 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4462 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4464 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4465 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4466 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4467 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4468 since \SpecialChar LyX
4469 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4470 file without the missing prerequisites.
4471 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4472 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4496 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4500 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4511 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4522 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4535 Some modules require other modules,
4536 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4538 will advise you about these things.
4546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4550 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4580 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4581 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4584 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4585 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4588 a particular document has very special needs,
4589 but you need a specific inset or
4590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4592 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4595 style only that one time.
4596 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4598 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4616 manual for information on how to use it.
4619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4624 Each class has a default set of options.
4625 Here's a quick table describing them:
4628 \begin_layout Standard
4629 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4635 \begin_layout Standard
4637 \begin_inset Tabular
4638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4639 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5098 \begin_layout Standard
5099 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 You're probably also wondering what
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset space ~
5115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5119 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5120 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5126 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5131 Some document classes,
5132 such as the ones for letters,
5133 don't use any section headings.
5154 We will describe these headings fully in section
5155 \begin_inset space ~
5159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5161 reference "subsec:Headings"
5169 \begin_layout Subsection
5171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5173 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5200 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5242 \begin_inset space ~
5248 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5249 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5250 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5251 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5252 -class and its options,
5253 you have to read its manual.
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5262 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5266 \begin_inset space ~
5273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5279 \begin_inset space ~
5284 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5285 You can choose between the following five options:
5288 \begin_layout Labeling
5289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5294 Use default page style of current class.
5297 \begin_layout Labeling
5298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5303 No page numbers or headings.
5306 \begin_layout Labeling
5307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5315 \begin_layout Labeling
5316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5321 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5322 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5323 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5326 \begin_layout Labeling
5327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5332 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5338 \begin_inset Index idx
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5361 How they are defined is explained in section
5362 \begin_inset space ~
5366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5368 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5378 \begin_inset space ~
5382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5384 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5392 \begin_layout Subsection
5393 Paper Size and Orientation
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5418 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 You can find the following options in the menu
5429 \begin_inset space ~
5436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5440 \begin_inset Index idx
5445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5464 \begin_layout Labeling
5465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5469 \begin_inset space ~
5474 What size paper to print on.
5479 \begin_layout Itemize
5485 \begin_layout Itemize
5491 \begin_layout Itemize
5497 \begin_layout Itemize
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5511 \begin_layout Itemize
5517 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Labeling
5525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5530 To choose whether to output as
5541 \begin_layout Labeling
5542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5546 \begin_inset space ~
5551 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5552 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5555 \begin_layout Subsection
5557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5559 name "subsec:Margins"
5564 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5586 \begin_inset Index idx
5591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 Paper margins are set in the menu
5603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5631 \begin_layout Standard
5632 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5633 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5636 \begin_layout Subsection
5640 \begin_layout Standard
5641 If you change a document class,
5643 has to convert everything into the new class.
5644 That includes the paragraph environments.
5645 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5646 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5647 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5648 If this is the case,
5649 and you change the document class,
5651 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5660 The name of the style is retained,
5661 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5662 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5663 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5666 \begin_layout Section
5667 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5668 \begin_inset Index idx
5673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5692 \begin_layout Subsection
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5696 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5705 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5708 \begin_layout Standard
5709 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5710 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5711 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5712 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5716 paragraph of a section,
5727 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5728 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5730 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5733 \begin_layout Standard
5734 The space between paragraphs,
5735 like the line spacing,
5736 the space between headings and text —
5738 all the spacing for just about everything —
5739 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5742 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5746 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5749 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5750 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5757 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5758 goes to produce a printable file.
5764 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5766 gives you the ability globally to change
5770 these pre-coded spacings.
5771 We will explain more later.
5774 \begin_layout Subsection
5775 Paragraph Separation
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5778 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5783 \begin_inset Index idx
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5807 \begin_layout Standard
5815 \begin_inset space ~
5823 \begin_inset space ~
5830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5834 \begin_inset Index idx
5839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5855 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5859 \begin_layout Subsection
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5864 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5869 \begin_inset space ~
5874 dialog and toggle the
5877 \begin_inset space ~
5882 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5885 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5889 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5890 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5893 \begin_layout Standard
5894 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5897 \begin_layout Subsection
5899 \begin_inset Index idx
5904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5906 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5930 \begin_inset Index idx
5935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset space ~
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5992 installed to use this feature.
5997 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6001 \begin_inset space ~
6006 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6009 \begin_layout Section
6010 Paragraph Environments
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6018 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6040 \begin_inset Index idx
6045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6046 Paragraph environments
6054 \begin_layout Subsection
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6071 } \SpecialChar ldots
6081 \begin_inset Newline newline
6084 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6086 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6088 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6089 we urge you to read the
6098 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 A paragraph environment is simply a
6103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6110 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6111 This can include a particular style of font,
6118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6125 the different environments inside one another,
6126 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6127 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6128 on the fly margin adjustment,
6129 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6130 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6131 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6135 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6136 use the pull-down box
6137 \begin_inset Graphics
6138 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6144 at the left end of the toolbar.
6146 will change the environment of the
6150 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6151 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6154 \begin_layout Standard
6163 create a new paragraph using the
6167 paragraph environment.
6169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6176 because if you are in one of these environments:
6179 \begin_layout Itemize
6185 \begin_layout Itemize
6191 \begin_layout Itemize
6197 \begin_layout Itemize
6203 \begin_layout Itemize
6209 \begin_layout Itemize
6215 \begin_layout Itemize
6221 \begin_layout Standard
6223 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6228 rather than resetting it to
6233 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6234 \begin_inset space ~
6238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6240 reference "sec:Nesting"
6248 \begin_layout Subsection
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 The default paragraph environment is
6258 It creates a plain paragraph.
6260 resets the paragraph environment,
6261 this is the one it chooses.
6263 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6270 \begin_layout Standard
6271 You can nest a paragraph using the
6275 environment in just about anything else,
6276 but you can't really nest anything in a
6283 \begin_layout Subsection
6285 \begin_inset Index idx
6290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6309 \begin_layout Standard
6310 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6311 title page has three parts:
6313 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 for thanks or contact information.
6322 For certain types of documents,
6324 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6325 For other types of documents,
6327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6334 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6337 \begin_layout Standard
6339 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6354 Here's how you use them:
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Put the title of your document in the
6365 \begin_layout Itemize
6366 Put the author name in the
6373 \begin_layout Itemize
6374 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6375 want to use a fixed date,
6376 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6377 put that text in the
6382 Note that using this environment is optional.
6383 If you don't provide any,
6385 will automatically insert today's date.
6386 If you don't want a date,
6389 Suppress default date on front page
6393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6396 \begin_inset space ~
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 You can use footnotes to insert
6406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6413 or contact information.
6416 \begin_layout Subsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6432 name "subsec:Headings"
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6440 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6442 takes care of the numbering for you.
6445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6447 \begin_inset Index idx
6452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 \begin_layout Standard
6472 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6476 \begin_layout Enumerate
6482 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6494 \begin_layout Enumerate
6500 \begin_layout Enumerate
6506 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 \begin_layout Enumerate
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6520 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6521 separated by periods.
6522 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6523 Unlike the other headings,
6524 parts are numbered with
6525 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6527 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6529 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6535 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6538 suppose you're writing a book.
6539 You group the book into chapters.
6541 does a similar grouping:
6544 \begin_layout Itemize
6549 is divided into either
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6572 \begin_layout Itemize
6584 \begin_layout Itemize
6596 \begin_layout Itemize
6608 \begin_layout Itemize
6620 \begin_layout Standard
6621 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 Not all document types use the
6634 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6639 is the top-level heading.
6647 \begin_layout Standard
6653 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6655 labels it with its number,
6656 along with the number of the subsection,
6659 chapter that it's in.
6661 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6699 The unnumbered section headings have a
6700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6707 at the end of their name.
6708 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6710 \begin_inset space ~
6714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6725 Changing the Numbering
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6728 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6735 \begin_layout Standard
6736 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6738 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6739 that's preset in the document class.
6740 Just as certain classes start with
6755 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6765 This is something you can change.
6768 \begin_layout Standard
6771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6775 \begin_inset Index idx
6780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6799 \begin_inset space ~
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6808 you will see two counters.
6813 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6814 numbers a section heading.
6815 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6819 Short Titles of Headings
6820 \begin_inset Index idx
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 \begin_inset Argument 1
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6854 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 Some section or chapter titles,
6865 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6867 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6868 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6873 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6874 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6875 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6876 To specify a short title,
6877 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6881 \begin_inset space ~
6887 This will insert a box labeled
6888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6899 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6900 This also works for captions inside floats.
6901 There can only be one short title per title.
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6905 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6912 \begin_layout Standard
6913 The following information applies to all section headings:
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6917 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6925 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6928 \begin_layout Itemize
6929 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6932 \begin_layout Subsection
6936 \begin_layout Standard
6938 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6954 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6955 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6956 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6957 They also allow nesting,
6967 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6970 \begin_layout Standard
6971 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6980 when you start a new paragraph.
6982 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6986 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6989 once you are done typing in that poem,
6990 you have to change back to the
6994 environment yourself.
6997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7006 \begin_inset Index idx
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7021 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7022 it's time for the differences.
7031 are identical except for one difference:
7036 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7045 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Here's an example of the
7063 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7064 See – no indentation!
7068 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7070 there's no indentation,
7071 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7075 Here's another example,
7083 \begin_layout Quotation
7090 you will see the indentation.
7091 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7096 is the environment for you!
7102 you were quoting other text.
7105 \begin_layout Quotation
7106 Here's a new paragraph.
7107 I could ramble on and on,
7108 like a politician at election time.
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7115 As the examples show,
7120 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7121 They should put quotes in the
7126 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7130 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7135 \begin_inset Index idx
7140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7183 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7192 \begin_inset Newline newline
7195 Which I did not rehearse!
7199 It could be much worse.
7200 This line could be long,
7203 so very long that it wraps around.
7204 It looks okay on screen,
7205 but in the printed version,
7206 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7208 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7217 And make things look fine
7218 \begin_inset Newline newline
7224 arg "newline-insert newline"
7230 \begin_layout Standard
7236 does not indent both margins.
7237 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7238 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7242 arg "newline-insert newline"
7248 \begin_layout Subsection
7250 \begin_inset Index idx
7255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7273 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7284 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7296 lets you provide your own label.
7297 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7308 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7317 reset the environment to
7321 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7322 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7323 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7327 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7331 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7332 it returns you to the
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7343 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7344 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7345 we suggest you read all of section
7346 \begin_inset space ~
7350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7352 reference "sec:Nesting"
7360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7362 \begin_inset Index idx
7367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7393 \begin_layout Standard
7394 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7398 paragraph environment.
7399 It has the following properties:
7402 \begin_layout Itemize
7403 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7407 \begin_layout Itemize
7409 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7412 \begin_layout Itemize
7413 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7417 \begin_layout Itemize
7418 The items can have any length.
7420 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7421 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7428 \begin_layout Itemize
7433 environment inside another
7438 the label changes to a new symbol.
7442 \begin_layout Itemize
7443 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7446 \begin_layout Itemize
7448 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7451 \begin_layout Itemize
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7459 reference "sec:Nesting"
7464 for a full explanation of nesting.
7468 \begin_layout Standard
7470 that explanation was also an example of an
7479 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7484 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7487 \begin_layout Itemize
7488 The label for the first level
7492 is a large black dot,
7497 \begin_layout Itemize
7498 The label for the second level is a dash.
7502 \begin_layout Itemize
7503 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7507 \begin_layout Itemize
7508 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7512 \begin_layout Itemize
7513 Back out to the third level.
7517 \begin_layout Itemize
7518 Back to the second level.
7522 \begin_layout Itemize
7523 Back to the outermost level.
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7527 These are the default labels for an
7532 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7537 dialog in the submenu
7542 \begin_inset Index idx
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7567 \begin_layout Standard
7568 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7569 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7576 reference "sec:Nesting"
7584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7586 \begin_inset Index idx
7591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7610 name "sec:Enumerate"
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7622 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7623 It has these properties:
7626 \begin_layout Enumerate
7627 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7631 \begin_layout Enumerate
7632 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7636 \begin_layout Enumerate
7638 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7641 \begin_layout Enumerate
7646 environment resets the counter to one.
7649 \begin_layout Enumerate
7663 \begin_layout Enumerate
7664 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7665 Items can have any length.
7668 \begin_layout Enumerate
7669 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7672 \begin_layout Enumerate
7673 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7676 \begin_layout Enumerate
7677 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7681 \begin_layout Standard
7691 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7693 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7694 labels the four different levels in an
7701 \begin_layout Enumerate
7702 The first level of an
7706 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7710 \begin_layout Enumerate
7711 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7715 \begin_layout Enumerate
7716 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7720 \begin_layout Enumerate
7721 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7724 \begin_layout Enumerate
7726 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 Back to the third level
7735 \begin_layout Enumerate
7736 Back to the second level.
7740 \begin_layout Enumerate
7741 Back to the outermost level.
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7745 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7751 \begin_inset space ~
7755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7757 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7763 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7764 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 There is more to nesting
7773 environments than we've stated here.
7774 You should read section
7775 \begin_inset space ~
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7781 reference "sec:Nesting"
7786 to learn more about nesting.
7789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7791 \begin_inset Index idx
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7815 \begin_layout Standard
7816 Unlike the previous two environments,
7821 list has no fixed label.
7825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7832 of the first line as the label.
7836 \begin_layout Description
7838 This is an example of the
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7847 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7850 \begin_layout Standard
7852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7859 it is meant that the first usage of the
7863 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7864 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7865 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7869 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7878 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7886 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_inset space ~
7903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7905 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7910 for more information.) Here is an example:
7913 \begin_layout Description
7915 \begin_inset space ~
7919 This one shows how to use a
7920 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7924 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7928 \begin_inset space ~
7940 \begin_layout Description
7946 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7947 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7948 It's not a good idea to use a
7952 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7953 You're better off using
7965 paragraphs into them.
7968 \begin_layout Description
7974 environments inside one another,
7975 nest them in other types of lists,
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 Notice that after the first line,
7982 indents subsequent lines,
7983 offsetting them from the first line.
7986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7988 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8017 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8022 \begin_layout Standard
8031 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8032 Here are its properties:
8035 \begin_layout Labeling
8036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8038 \begin_inset space ~
8041 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8050 of each line as the item label.
8055 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8056 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8058 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8060 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8063 space as described above.
8066 \begin_layout Labeling
8067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8068 margins As you can see,
8070 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8071 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8072 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8075 \begin_layout Labeling
8076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8078 \begin_inset space ~
8081 width \SpecialChar LyX
8082 uses the width of the label,
8083 or the default width,
8085 If the label width is larger,
8087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8094 into the first line.
8096 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8099 \begin_layout Labeling
8100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8105 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8109 environment has the same left margin.
8110 \begin_inset Newline newline
8113 To change the default width,
8114 select all items in the list.
8117 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8119 \begin_inset space ~
8124 dialog (toolbar button
8127 arg "layout-paragraph"
8134 \begin_inset space ~
8139 determines the default label width.
8140 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8141 but you can also use the letter
8142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8149 multiple times instead.
8150 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8160 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8163 \begin_inset space ~
8168 every time you alter a label in a
8173 \begin_inset Newline newline
8176 The predefined default width is the length of
8177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8196 list the same way as the
8201 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8206 environment gives you another way to do this,
8207 using a different overall layout.
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8215 lists inside one another,
8216 nest them in other types of lists,
8218 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8220 \begin_inset space ~
8224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8226 reference "sec:Nesting"
8231 to learn about nesting.
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8235 There is yet another feature of the
8240 As you can see in the examples,
8242 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8243 You can use additional
8246 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8251 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8252 justifies the item label.
8256 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8258 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8260 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8265 are documented in section
8266 \begin_inset space ~
8270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8272 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8278 Here are some examples:
8281 \begin_layout Labeling
8282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8283 Left The default for
8290 \begin_layout Labeling
8291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8298 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8303 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8306 \begin_layout Labeling
8307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8312 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8318 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8323 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8326 \begin_layout Subsection
8328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8330 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8335 \begin_inset Index idx
8340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 The features described in this section require that the module
8362 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8364 is loaded in the document settings.
8365 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8371 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8397 Custom Enumerate Lists
8398 \begin_inset Index idx
8403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8405 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8432 \begin_layout Standard
8434 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8439 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8440 There you add the command
8443 \begin_layout Standard
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8464 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8473 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8487 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8494 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8495 For capital Roman numerals replace
8507 in the command above.
8508 For Arabic numerals use
8516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8523 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8550 You can only number 26
8551 \begin_inset space ~
8554 items with Latin letters,
8555 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8565 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8571 \begin_layout Standard
8572 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8575 \begin_layout Enumerate
8576 \begin_inset Argument 1
8579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 \begin_inset Argument 1
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 \begin_layout Enumerate
8638 \begin_inset Argument 1
8641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8665 \begin_layout Enumerate
8666 \begin_inset Argument 1
8669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 For this list these commands were used:
8699 \begin_layout Standard
8710 \begin_inset Newline newline
8718 \begin_inset Newline newline
8726 \begin_inset Newline newline
8736 \begin_layout Standard
8743 makes the label emphasized and
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8762 When you change the label of a list level,
8763 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8773 \begin_inset Index idx
8778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8808 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8811 \begin_layout Enumerate
8812 \begin_inset Argument 1
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 \begin_inset Note Note
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8838 goes back to default numbering
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 To resume an enumeration,
8866 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8867 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8868 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8885 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8886 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8897 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8898 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8903 \begin_layout Standard
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8914 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Enumerate
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8930 \begin_layout Enumerate
8931 \begin_inset Argument 1
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8950 This enumeration starts at 4
8953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8955 \begin_inset Index idx
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8981 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 with standard spacing
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8994 Add there the command
8998 to get no additional list space like in this example:
9001 \begin_layout Itemize
9002 \begin_inset Argument 1
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Itemize
9032 \begin_layout Standard
9033 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9039 \begin_inset Index idx
9044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 For more information see its documentation,
9064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9076 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9080 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
9084 \begin_inset Argument 1
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 \begin_layout Enumerate
9110 with negative indentation
9113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9114 Further Customization
9115 \begin_inset Index idx
9120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9139 \begin_layout Standard
9140 You can also change the style of description lists.
9144 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 changes the description label font,
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 sets the list style.
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 An example where the command
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9182 \begin_layout Description
9184 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_inset Argument 1
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9213 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9214 therefore ionizing them.
9217 \begin_layout Description
9219 \begin_inset space ~
9223 In computer science,
9224 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9226 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9228 disk space or other resource.
9231 \begin_layout Standard
9232 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9238 \begin_inset Index idx
9243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 For more information see its documentation
9262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9272 \begin_layout Subsection
9274 \begin_inset Index idx
9279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9290 \begin_inset space ~
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9299 has document classes for letters,
9300 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9307 \begin_inset space ~
9313 To use the letter class,
9314 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9315 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9316 gags on the document.
9325 \begin_inset space ~
9330 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9331 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9332 though you can't nest anything in them.
9335 \begin_layout Standard
9337 you're not limited to using
9344 \begin_inset space ~
9353 \begin_inset space ~
9360 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9367 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9379 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9380 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9385 \begin_inset space ~
9390 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9391 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9392 Here's an example of each:
9395 \begin_layout Right Address
9397 \begin_inset Newline newline
9401 \begin_inset Newline newline
9405 \begin_inset Newline newline
9412 \begin_layout Standard
9416 \begin_inset space ~
9422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9423 which \SpecialChar LyX
9424 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9425 Here's an example of the
9432 \begin_layout Address
9434 \begin_inset Newline newline
9437 Where do I send this
9438 \begin_inset Newline newline
9441 Your post office and country
9444 \begin_layout Standard
9453 \begin_inset space ~
9458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9463 in either of these environments,
9465 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9480 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9489 arg "newline-insert newline"
9494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9497 \begin_inset space ~
9501 \begin_inset space ~
9506 ) to start a new line in an
9513 \begin_inset space ~
9521 \begin_layout Subsection
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9528 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9533 \begin_inset Index idx
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9547 \begin_layout Standard
9552 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9554 you could use this environment anywhere,
9555 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9558 don't bother trying to nest
9562 in anything else or vice versa.
9568 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9569 The book document classes ignores the
9574 and it's utterly silly to use
9578 in a letter document class.
9581 \begin_layout Standard
9586 environment does several things for you.
9588 it puts the centered label
9589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9597 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9599 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9600 just as you'd expect.
9602 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9604 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9609 \begin_layout Standard
9610 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9614 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9615 The new paragraph will still be in the
9621 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9624 \begin_layout Standard
9625 \begin_inset Float figure
9632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9634 \begin_inset Graphics
9635 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9643 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9648 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9669 \begin_layout Standard
9670 We would love to demonstrate the
9675 but since this document is in the
9676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9685 We inserted it therefore as figure
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9692 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9698 If you have never heard of an
9699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9707 you can safely ignore this environment.
9710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9712 \begin_inset Index idx
9717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9726 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9738 environment is used to list references.
9740 you could use this environment anywhere,
9741 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9753 \begin_layout Standard
9754 When you first open a
9760 adds a large vertical space,
9761 followed by the heading
9762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9777 depending on the document class.
9778 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9779 Each paragraph of the
9783 environment is a bibliography entry.
9789 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9790 Each new paragraph is still in the
9797 \begin_layout Standard
9799 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9801 For more information on that,
9802 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9803 's bibliography handling,
9804 have a look at section
9805 \begin_inset space ~
9809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9811 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9820 Special Environments
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9825 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9833 \begin_inset Index idx
9838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9848 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9855 \begin_layout Standard
9861 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9863 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9868 key as a fixed whitespace.
9872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9884 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9892 \begin_inset space ~
9896 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9898 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9903 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9922 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9924 If you need to insert blank lines,
9925 you will still need to use
9928 arg "newline-insert newline"
9947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9949 when you finish using the
9955 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9962 environment inside of others.
9965 \begin_layout Standard
9966 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 arg "newline-insert newline"
9976 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9981 \begin_inset space \space{}
9991 arg "newline-insert newline"
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 arg "newline-insert newline"
10011 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10018 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10019 You must put at least one
10023 in any line you want blank.
10029 \begin_layout Itemize
10030 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10034 since that will insert
10039 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10042 arg "self-insert \""
10048 \begin_layout Standard
10049 Here is an example:
10052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10068 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10069 printf("Hello World!
10074 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10078 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10082 \begin_layout Standard
10083 This is just the standard
10084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10094 \begin_layout Standard
10102 such as program source,
10103 shell scripts and so on.
10104 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10105 \begin_inset Index idx
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Paragraph environments
10116 For longer parts of programming code,
10117 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10119 Program Code Listings
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10136 \begin_inset Index idx
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10155 environment is similar to the
10160 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10165 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10179 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10180 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10182 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10185 space) and you can have empty lines.
10199 \begin_layout Itemize
10200 have a certain language and a text style
10203 \begin_layout Itemize
10204 contain hyperlinks,
10206 foot- and margin notes,
10210 index- and nomenclature entries,
10215 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10219 \begin_layout Standard
10220 Because of these properties
10224 works like a typewriter.
10225 Here is an example:
10228 \begin_layout Verbatim
10232 \begin_layout Verbatim
10235 The following 2 lines are empty:
10238 \begin_layout Verbatim
10242 \begin_layout Verbatim
10246 \begin_layout Verbatim
10247 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10252 \begin_layout Standard
10257 environment is identical to
10261 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10262 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10269 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10273 \begin_layout Section
10274 Nesting Environments
10275 \begin_inset Index idx
10280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10306 \begin_layout Subsection
10310 \begin_layout Standard
10312 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10313 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10314 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10315 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10317 you have a list inside of another list,
10318 with the inner list
10319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10338 \begin_layout Enumerate
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10347 \begin_layout Enumerate
10351 \begin_layout Standard
10352 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10353 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10356 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10358 \begin_inset space ~
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_inset space ~
10379 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10380 Instead of the menu,
10381 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10384 arg "depth-increment"
10390 arg "depth-decrement"
10393 or the key bindings
10404 arg "depth-increment"
10410 arg "depth-decrement"
10414 The change will work on the current selection,
10415 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10416 or the current paragraph.
10419 \begin_layout Standard
10420 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10421 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10422 If it is invalid to do so,
10423 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10425 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10426 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10431 In \SpecialChar LyX
10433 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10434 as you're about to find out.
10435 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10438 \begin_layout Subsection
10439 What You Can and Can't Nest
10442 \begin_layout Standard
10443 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10444 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10447 \begin_layout Standard
10448 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10449 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10452 \begin_layout Itemize
10453 Completely unnestable
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10458 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10461 \begin_layout Itemize
10463 you can nest them into other environments,
10464 but you can't nest anything into them.
10467 \begin_layout Standard
10468 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10469 and which paragraph environments have them:
10472 \begin_layout Description
10473 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10474 Can't nest into them.
10478 \begin_layout Itemize
10484 \begin_layout Itemize
10490 \begin_layout Itemize
10496 \begin_layout Itemize
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10509 \begin_layout Description
10511 \begin_inset space ~
10514 Nestable You can nest them.
10515 You can nest other things into them.
10519 \begin_layout Itemize
10525 \begin_layout Itemize
10531 \begin_layout Itemize
10537 \begin_layout Itemize
10543 \begin_layout Itemize
10549 \begin_layout Itemize
10555 \begin_layout Itemize
10561 \begin_layout Itemize
10568 \begin_layout Itemize
10574 \begin_layout Itemize
10581 \begin_layout Description
10582 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10583 You can't nest anything into them.
10587 \begin_layout Itemize
10593 \begin_layout Itemize
10599 \begin_layout Itemize
10605 \begin_layout Itemize
10611 \begin_layout Itemize
10617 \begin_layout Itemize
10623 \begin_layout Itemize
10629 \begin_layout Itemize
10635 \begin_layout Itemize
10641 \begin_layout Itemize
10647 \begin_layout Itemize
10653 \begin_layout Itemize
10659 \begin_layout Itemize
10665 \begin_layout Itemize
10669 \begin_inset space ~
10675 \begin_layout Itemize
10682 \begin_layout Standard
10683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10692 Although it is possible,
10694 to nest numbered section headings like
10705 \begin_inset space ~
10709 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10717 \begin_layout Subsection
10718 Nesting Other Things:
10723 \begin_inset Index idx
10728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10747 \begin_layout Standard
10748 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10749 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10753 \begin_layout Itemize
10757 \begin_layout Itemize
10761 \begin_layout Itemize
10765 \begin_layout Standard
10767 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10776 Figures and tables in
10780 are not affected by this.
10785 Have a look at section
10786 \begin_inset space ~
10790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10792 reference "sec:Floats"
10797 for more information about
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10809 or an equation is inline,
10810 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10813 \begin_layout Standard
10815 if you have an equation,
10816 figure or table in a
10817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10825 it behaves just like a
10826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10833 paragraph environment.
10834 You can nest it into any environment,
10835 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 Here's an example with a table:
10842 \begin_layout Enumerate
10847 \begin_layout Enumerate
10848 This is (a) and it's nested.
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10859 \begin_layout Standard
10861 \begin_inset Tabular
10862 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10863 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10864 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10865 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10949 \begin_layout Standard
10950 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10957 \begin_layout Enumerate
10959 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10963 \begin_layout Enumerate
10967 \begin_layout Standard
10968 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10969 the list would look like this:
10972 \begin_layout Enumerate
10977 \begin_layout Enumerate
10978 This is (a) and it's nested.
10982 \begin_layout Standard
10983 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10989 \begin_layout Standard
10991 \begin_inset Tabular
10992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10994 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10995 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11079 \begin_layout Standard
11080 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11086 \begin_layout Enumerate
11094 it's not nested at all.
11097 \begin_layout Enumerate
11101 \begin_layout Standard
11102 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11103 but is also the first item of a new list!
11106 \begin_layout Standard
11107 There's another trap you can fall into:
11109 but not going deep enough.
11111 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11114 \begin_layout Enumerate
11119 \begin_layout Enumerate
11120 This is (a) and it's nested.
11123 \begin_layout Standard
11124 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11130 \begin_layout Standard
11132 \begin_inset Tabular
11133 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11134 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11135 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11136 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11221 \begin_layout Standard
11222 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11228 \begin_layout Enumerate
11230 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11238 \begin_layout Enumerate
11242 \begin_layout Standard
11244 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11250 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11252 if you nest tables,
11253 figures or equations,
11254 make sure you go to the right depth!
11257 \begin_layout Subsection
11258 Usage and General Features
11261 \begin_layout Standard
11262 Speaking of levels,
11264 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11274 is the innermost possible depth.
11275 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11278 \begin_layout Enumerate
11279 level #1 – outermost
11283 \begin_layout Enumerate
11288 \begin_layout Enumerate
11293 \begin_layout Enumerate
11298 \begin_layout Itemize
11303 \begin_layout Itemize
11312 \begin_layout Standard
11313 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11314 and you can see both of them in the example.
11315 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11316 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11326 if we tried to nest another
11331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11339 we would get errors.
11342 \begin_layout Subsection
11344 \begin_inset Index idx
11349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11351 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11368 \begin_layout Standard
11369 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11370 We have several examples of nested environments.
11372 we explain how we created the example,
11373 so that you can reproduce them.
11376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11378 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11381 \begin_layout Labeling
11382 \labelwidthstring MMM
11383 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11392 \begin_layout Labeling
11393 \labelwidthstring MMM
11394 #2-a This is level #2.
11395 We created it by using
11398 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11404 arg "depth-increment"
11411 \begin_layout Labeling
11412 \labelwidthstring MMM
11413 #3-a This is level #3.
11423 arg "depth-increment"
11427 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11431 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11437 arg "depth-increment"
11444 \begin_layout Standard
11451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11461 We did this by entering
11464 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11471 arg "depth-increment"
11475 then changing the paragraph environment to
11480 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11481 it also works for the
11498 \begin_layout Standard
11508 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11514 \begin_layout Labeling
11515 \labelwidthstring MMM
11516 #4-a This is level #4.
11520 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11523 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11529 we can't nest anything inside a
11534 which is why we're still at level #4.
11540 keep nesting things inside
11541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11552 \begin_layout Labeling
11553 \labelwidthstring MMM
11554 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11559 \begin_layout Labeling
11560 \labelwidthstring MMM
11561 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11562 and this is level #6.
11564 you should know how we made these two.
11568 \begin_layout Labeling
11569 \labelwidthstring MMM
11570 #5-b Back to level #5.
11574 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11580 arg "depth-decrement"
11587 \begin_layout Labeling
11588 \labelwidthstring MMM
11592 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11598 arg "depth-decrement"
11602 we're back at level #4.
11606 \begin_layout Labeling
11607 \labelwidthstring MMM
11608 #3-b Back to level #3.
11609 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11613 \begin_layout Labeling
11614 \labelwidthstring MMM
11615 #2-b Back to level #2.
11619 \begin_layout Labeling
11620 \labelwidthstring MMM
11622 back to the outermost level,
11624 After this sentence,
11629 and change the paragraph environment back to
11636 \begin_layout Standard
11637 We could have also used the
11656 environment in place of the
11661 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11669 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11670 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11675 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11685 arg "depth-increment"
11690 \begin_inset Newline newline
11694 we will change to the
11702 \begin_layout Enumerate
11711 \begin_layout Enumerate
11712 Notice how the nested
11716 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11721 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11725 \begin_layout Standard
11726 We ended this example by entering
11732 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11736 and reset the nesting depth by using
11739 arg "depth-decrement"
11745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11758 \begin_inset Argument 1
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 Levels and other list environments
11772 \begin_layout Enumerate
11778 paragraph environment.
11779 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11783 \begin_layout Enumerate
11788 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11794 arg "depth-increment"
11799 what happens if we nest an
11803 environment inside of this one?
11804 It will be at level #3,
11805 but what will its label be?
11810 \begin_layout Itemize
11822 even though it's at level #3.
11824 its label is a bullet.
11825 (We got here by using
11828 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11835 arg "depth-increment"
11839 then changing the environment to
11847 \begin_layout Itemize
11852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11859 arg "depth-increment"
11863 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11868 \begin_layout Enumerate
11870 to get to level #5.
11873 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11878 Notice the type of numbering,
11884 because we are in the
11892 environment (that is,
11908 \begin_layout Enumerate
11913 change the paragraph environment,
11914 but decrease the nesting depth?
11915 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11919 \begin_layout Enumerate
11921 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11925 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11928 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11931 \begin_layout Enumerate
11935 arg "depth-decrement"
11938 to decrease the depth after the next
11941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11948 \begin_layout Enumerate
11950 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11955 \begin_layout Enumerate
11957 Even though we've changed levels,
11959 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11962 \begin_layout Enumerate
11964 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11976 that \SpecialChar LyX
11981 reset the counter for the label.
11985 \begin_layout Enumerate
11989 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11995 arg "depth-decrement"
11999 and we're back to level #2.
12001 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12002 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12010 \begin_layout Enumerate
12011 The same thing happens if we do another
12014 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12020 arg "depth-decrement"
12023 sequence and return to level #1,
12024 the outermost level.
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12029 we reset the environment to
12035 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12045 The number of other
12049 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12055 The same rule applies for the
12063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12068 \begin_layout Enumerate
12069 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12070 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12071 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12081 \begin_layout Standard
12090 arg "depth-increment"
12099 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12101 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12102 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12103 Either before or after this,
12104 we will put in the level.
12108 \begin_layout Enumerate
12115 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12119 \begin_layout Verse
12120 Now we will add verse.
12121 \begin_inset Newline newline
12124 It will get much worse.
12125 \begin_inset Newline newline
12136 arg "depth-increment"
12148 \begin_layout Verse
12151 \begin_inset Newline newline
12154 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12155 \begin_inset Newline newline
12161 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12169 \begin_layout Verse
12170 Here comes a table:
12174 \begin_layout Standard
12175 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12181 \begin_layout Standard
12183 \begin_inset Tabular
12184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12272 \begin_layout Verse
12276 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12288 arg "depth-increment"
12295 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12302 \begin_inset Newline newline
12310 arg "depth-decrement"
12317 \begin_layout Enumerate
12324 level #1) This is another item.
12325 Note that selecting a
12329 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12330 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12337 \begin_layout Quotation
12338 We're now ending the
12342 list and changing to
12347 We're still at level #1.
12348 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12349 The next set of paragraphs is a
12350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12357 We will nest both the
12364 \begin_inset space ~
12369 environments inside of this one,
12370 then use another nested
12374 for the letter body.
12378 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12381 to preserve the depth.
12382 Remember that you need to use
12385 arg "newline-insert newline"
12388 to create multiple lines inside the
12395 \begin_inset space ~
12405 \begin_layout Right Address
12407 \begin_inset Newline newline
12412 \begin_inset Newline newline
12418 \begin_layout Address
12420 \begin_inset space ~
12426 \begin_layout Quotation
12427 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12431 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12433 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12434 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12435 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12437 we thank you for your patience.
12440 \begin_layout Quotation
12443 now have a special on beef.
12444 If you are interested,
12445 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12446 along with payment.
12449 \begin_layout Quotation
12450 We thank you again for your patience.
12453 \begin_layout Address
12455 \begin_inset Newline newline
12462 \begin_layout Quotation
12463 That ends that example!
12466 \begin_layout Standard
12468 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12469 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12470 We could have easily nested an
12492 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12495 \begin_layout Subsection
12497 \begin_inset Index idx
12502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12504 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12521 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12528 \begin_layout Standard
12529 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12530 For example you need two different enumerations:
12533 \begin_layout Enumerate
12538 \begin_layout Enumerate
12543 \begin_layout Enumerate
12547 \begin_layout Standard
12548 \begin_inset Separator plain
12554 \begin_layout Itemize
12560 \begin_layout Standard
12561 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12567 \begin_layout Enumerate
12571 \begin_layout Enumerate
12575 \begin_layout Enumerate
12579 \begin_layout Standard
12580 To split an existing list into two lists,
12581 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12583 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12584 Separated <Name> Above
12588 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12589 Separated <Name> Below
12592 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12593 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12594 Inside nested environments,
12595 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12600 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12605 you get an environment separator when you press
12608 arg "paragraph-break"
12615 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12618 \begin_layout Section
12620 Pagination and Line Breaks
12621 \begin_inset Index idx
12626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12635 \begin_layout Standard
12637 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12639 offers you more spaces:
12640 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12641 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12644 \begin_layout Subsection
12646 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12648 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12654 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12659 \begin_inset Index idx
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12666 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12671 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12673 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12689 \begin_layout Standard
12691 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12693 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12697 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12698 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12700 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12703 break the line at that point.
12704 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12708 \begin_layout Quote
12709 Further documentation is given in section
12710 \begin_inset Newline newline
12714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12716 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12724 \begin_layout Standard
12726 it would be a good thing to put a
12727 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12729 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12747 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12758 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12760 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12768 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12770 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12774 \begin_inset space ~
12782 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12788 \begin_layout Subsection
12790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12792 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12797 \begin_inset Index idx
12802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12821 \begin_layout Standard
12822 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12825 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 The length units are listed in Appendix
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12836 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12846 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12848 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12852 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12856 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12861 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12865 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12872 \begin_inset Index idx
12877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12884 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12886 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12902 \begin_layout Standard
12903 With the introduction of typewriters,
12904 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12905 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12906 automatically takes care about this.
12908 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12916 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12922 To insert a normal space,
12925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12926 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12928 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12930 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12942 arg "space-insert normal"
12948 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12950 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12956 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12961 \begin_inset Index idx
12966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12985 \begin_layout Standard
12987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12991 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12998 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13003 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13005 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13013 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13015 inside abbreviations:
13018 \begin_layout Quote
13020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13024 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13027 \begin_layout Standard
13028 or between values and units.
13029 Compare for example this:
13030 \begin_inset Newline newline
13034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13038 \begin_inset Newline newline
13041 10 kg (normal space
13042 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13048 \begin_layout Standard
13049 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13051 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13052 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13054 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13056 \begin_inset space ~
13062 \begin_inset space ~
13070 arg "space-insert thin"
13076 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13080 \begin_layout Standard
13081 You can also insert the following space types:
13084 \begin_layout Description
13086 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13088 \begin_inset space ~
13094 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13098 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13102 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13106 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13111 space between the arrows.
13112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13116 \begin_layout Description
13118 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13120 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13124 \begin_inset space ~
13127 space A line with a
13128 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13132 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13136 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13140 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13142 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13145 space between the arrows.
13148 \begin_layout Description
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13157 space A line with a
13158 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13162 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13166 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13169 negative thin space between the arrows.
13172 \begin_layout Description
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13181 space A line with a
13182 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13186 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13190 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13193 negative medium space between the arrows.
13196 \begin_layout Description
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13205 space A line with a
13206 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13210 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13217 negative thick space between the arrows.
13220 \begin_layout Description
13222 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13224 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13226 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13240 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13244 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13248 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13252 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13254 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13256 \begin_inset space ~
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13269 em) space between the arrows.
13272 \begin_layout Description
13274 \begin_inset space ~
13278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13282 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13286 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13290 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13294 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13296 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13307 em) space between the arrows.
13310 \begin_layout Description
13312 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13314 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13330 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13334 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13338 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13342 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13344 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13346 \begin_inset space ~
13350 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13354 \begin_inset space ~
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13361 em) space between the arrows.
13364 \begin_layout Description
13366 \begin_inset space ~
13370 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13374 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13379 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13386 cm space between the arrows.
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13397 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13402 lists the different space sizes.
13405 \begin_layout Standard
13406 \begin_inset Float table
13413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13414 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13419 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13423 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13433 \begin_inset Tabular
13434 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13435 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13436 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13437 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13439 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13450 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13487 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13492 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13494 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13495 Non-breaking Normal
13502 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13517 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13526 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13531 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13535 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13537 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13552 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13558 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13564 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13569 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13580 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13581 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13586 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13609 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13623 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13625 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13629 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13645 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13693 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13698 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13700 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13704 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13706 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13718 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13723 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13725 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13733 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13735 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13764 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13784 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13786 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13798 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13826 \begin_inset Index idx
13831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13833 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13850 \begin_layout Standard
13851 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13852 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13854 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13857 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13858 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13859 If there is more than one H
13860 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13864 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13867 \begin_layout Standard
13868 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13871 \begin_layout Quote
13873 This is on the left side
13874 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13877 This is on the right
13880 \begin_layout Quote
13883 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13887 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13893 \begin_layout Quote
13896 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13900 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13910 \begin_layout Standard
13911 That was an example in the
13917 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13921 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13925 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13928 is one in a standard paragraph.
13929 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13934 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13937 \begin_layout Standard
13939 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13941 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13944 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13947 \begin_inset space ~
13952 s in the space dialog:
13953 The following patterns are available:
13956 \begin_layout Standard
13959 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13963 \begin_inset space ~
13969 \begin_layout Standard
13972 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13976 \begin_inset space ~
13982 \begin_layout Standard
13985 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13995 \begin_layout Standard
13998 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14002 \begin_inset space ~
14008 \begin_layout Standard
14010 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14012 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14016 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14017 (= opened downwards)
14021 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14025 \begin_inset space ~
14031 \begin_layout Standard
14033 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14039 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14044 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14048 \begin_inset space ~
14054 \begin_layout Standard
14055 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14065 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14067 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14070 is at the beginning of a line,
14075 in the first line in a paragraph,
14079 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14081 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14084 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14085 If you need space in this case anyway,
14087 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14091 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14096 option in the space dialog.
14104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14108 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14113 \begin_inset Index idx
14118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14120 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14137 \begin_layout Standard
14138 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14140 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14143 \begin_layout Standard
14144 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14147 What is correct English?:
14148 \begin_inset Newline newline
14152 \begin_inset Newline newline
14156 \begin_inset space ~
14159 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14160 \begin_inset Newline newline
14164 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14175 \begin_inset Newline newline
14179 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14190 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14196 \begin_layout Standard
14198 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14203 \begin_inset space ~
14207 \begin_inset space ~
14211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14216 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14219 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14223 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14239 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14248 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14249 That is why it is named
14250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14258 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14259 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14262 \begin_layout Subsection
14264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14266 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14271 \begin_inset Index idx
14276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14295 \begin_layout Standard
14296 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14299 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14300 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14308 There you find the following sizes:
14311 \begin_layout Standard
14315 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14324 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14332 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14337 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14338 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14342 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14347 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14349 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14350 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14352 \begin_inset space ~
14358 \begin_inset Index idx
14363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14379 for the paragraph separation.
14380 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14383 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14391 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14397 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14401 \begin_layout Standard
14403 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14412 equal to the height,
14413 or half the height,
14414 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14419 \begin_layout Standard
14423 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14429 \begin_inset Index idx
14434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14436 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14450 is a variable space,
14451 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14453 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14458 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14459 because the space between them is then maximal.
14463 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14471 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14477 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14485 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14490 s are described in section
14491 \begin_inset space ~
14495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14497 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14507 If there are several
14510 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14516 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14517 You can therefore use
14520 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14525 s to center text on a page,
14526 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14529 \begin_layout Standard
14534 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14535 \begin_inset space ~
14539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14541 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14549 \begin_layout Standard
14550 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14561 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14562 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14574 \begin_layout Subsection
14575 Paragraph Alignment
14576 \begin_inset Index idx
14581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14600 \begin_layout Standard
14601 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14606 dialog (toolbar button
14609 arg "layout-paragraph"
14613 There are five possibilities:
14616 \begin_layout Itemize
14624 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14630 \begin_layout Itemize
14638 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14644 \begin_layout Itemize
14652 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14658 \begin_layout Itemize
14666 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14672 \begin_layout Itemize
14680 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14686 \begin_layout Standard
14687 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14688 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14689 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14690 and look like this:
14693 \begin_layout Standard
14695 This paragraph is right aligned,
14698 \begin_layout Standard
14700 this one is centered,
14703 \begin_layout Standard
14705 this one is left aligned.
14708 \begin_layout Subsection
14710 \begin_inset Index idx
14715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14717 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14734 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14741 \begin_layout Standard
14742 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14743 does the page breaks in your document,
14744 you can force a page break where you want one.
14745 Normally this will not be necessary,
14746 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14747 is good at page breaking.
14748 Only if you use a lot of
14754 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14757 \begin_layout Standard
14758 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14762 have to change the page breaking.
14765 \begin_layout Standard
14766 There are two types of page breaks:
14767 One that ends the page without any special action.
14768 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14773 \begin_inset space ~
14780 that is inserted via the menu
14782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14783 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14791 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14792 so that it fills out the complete page.
14793 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14796 \begin_layout Standard
14797 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14800 the wrong way to do it.
14802 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14803 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14807 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14812 to learn more about
14819 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14823 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14828 \begin_inset Index idx
14833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14852 \begin_layout Standard
14853 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14854 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14855 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14856 including unprocessed floats,
14857 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14858 if necessary by adding pages.
14861 \begin_layout Standard
14862 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14865 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14873 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14874 you can use the menu
14876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14877 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14879 \begin_inset space ~
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14888 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14889 if necessary by adding a page.
14890 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14894 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14896 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14897 Suppressing Page Breaks
14900 \begin_inset Index idx
14905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14907 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14926 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14930 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14935 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14939 \begin_layout Standard
14941 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14942 To discourage page break at
14943 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14945 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14946 certain point you can use
14950 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14952 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14955 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14957 \change_deleted 5381 1686690158
14959 \change_inserted 5381 1686690161
14961 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14968 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14969 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14974 \begin_layout Subsection
14976 \begin_inset Index idx
14981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14988 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14990 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14997 \begin_layout Standard
14998 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14999 one simply breaks the line.
15000 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
15002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15003 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15005 \begin_inset space ~
15009 \begin_inset space ~
15017 arg "newline-insert newline"
15021 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15024 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15030 \begin_inset space ~
15038 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15041 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15042 This is useful to avoid
15043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15050 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15053 \begin_layout Standard
15054 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15056 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15057 is very good at line breaking.
15060 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15062 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15063 \begin_inset space ~
15067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15069 reference "sec:Quote"
15076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15078 reference "sec:Verse"
15084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15086 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15094 \begin_layout Subsection
15096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15098 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15103 \begin_inset Index idx
15108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15117 \begin_layout Standard
15119 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15130 \begin_layout Standard
15134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15135 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15137 \begin_inset space ~
15142 you can insert horizontal lines.
15143 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15144 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15147 \begin_layout Standard
15149 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15160 \begin_layout Section
15161 Characters and Symbols
15164 \begin_layout Standard
15165 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15166 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15168 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15176 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15181 for information on how this is done.
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15185 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15190 dialog via the menu
15192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15193 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15199 \begin_layout Standard
15200 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15209 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15211 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15219 \begin_layout Section
15220 Fonts and Text Styles
15221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15223 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15230 \begin_layout Subsection
15232 \begin_inset Index idx
15237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15239 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15256 \begin_layout Standard
15257 There are two types of fonts:
15260 \begin_layout Description
15262 \begin_inset space ~
15266 \begin_inset Index idx
15271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15273 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15287 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15292 characters) in the font.
15293 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15294 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15295 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15296 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15297 \begin_inset Newline newline
15300 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15301 But to achieve a better quality,
15302 many fonts define several font sizes.
15303 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15304 \begin_inset Newline newline
15320 \begin_inset space ~
15328 \begin_layout Description
15330 \begin_inset space ~
15334 \begin_inset Index idx
15339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15356 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15357 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15359 they don't scale well,
15360 because in order to scale a glyph,
15361 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15362 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15363 In order to mitigate this effect,
15364 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15365 \begin_inset space ~
15368 pixels high up to 34
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15372 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15373 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15374 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15375 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15377 \begin_inset Newline newline
15380 Bitmap fonts are named
15383 \begin_inset space ~
15388 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15392 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15393 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15394 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15395 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15398 \begin_layout Standard
15399 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15400 look at its document properties.
15403 \begin_layout Standard
15404 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15405 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15407 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15410 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15412 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15413 to emphasize text you use an
15414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15422 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15424 In \SpecialChar LyX
15426 you do things based on contexts,
15427 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15430 \begin_layout Subsection
15433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15435 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15442 \begin_layout Standard
15445 used its own fonts.
15447 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15448 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15450 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15451 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15452 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15453 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15454 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15455 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15456 files are very portable across different machines.
15458 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15459 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15460 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15462 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15463 \begin_inset space ~
15467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15469 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15475 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15476 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15479 \begin_layout Standard
15480 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15481 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15482 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15483 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15485 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15488 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15489 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15492 \begin_layout Standard
15493 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15503 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15505 or other font deficiencies;
15506 so you might have to experiment.
15514 \begin_layout Subsection
15515 Document Font and Font size
15516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15518 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15523 \begin_inset Index idx
15528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15530 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15545 \begin_inset Index idx
15550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15552 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15569 \begin_layout Standard
15570 You can set the document fonts in the
15572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15576 \begin_inset Index idx
15581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 section of the dialog,
15603 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15608 \begin_inset space ~
15618 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15619 \begin_inset space ~
15622 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15625 \begin_layout Standard
15631 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15632 This requires that you use
15645 as the output format,
15647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15651 \begin_inset space \space{}
15654 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15655 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15656 installed (see section
15657 \begin_inset space ~
15661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15663 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15669 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15671 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15672 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15674 \begin_inset space ~
15679 since \SpecialChar LyX
15680 cannot determine the family.
15681 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15682 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15685 cannot determine this in advance,
15686 so you might need to experiment.
15689 \begin_layout Standard
15690 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15691 fonts (which is the default),
15692 the possible options for the font include
15696 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15703 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15705 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15707 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15712 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15714 depending on the document language,
15718 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15719 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15727 \begin_inset space ~
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15743 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15744 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15752 \begin_inset space ~
15758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15766 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15788 European Computer Modern
15791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15800 some classes set different default fonts.
15803 \begin_layout Standard
15809 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15810 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15815 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15818 \begin_inset space ~
15823 version 6 or later,
15824 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15829 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15830 you have to use a vector font.
15831 Depending on how your document should look,
15835 \begin_layout Itemize
15839 \begin_inset space ~
15845 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15857 \begin_inset space ~
15862 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15863 community in order to replace
15867 as the default font.
15868 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15869 Except for some details,
15870 where the appearance was improved,
15874 \begin_inset space ~
15887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15888 One difference is improved kerning.
15896 \begin_layout Itemize
15897 If you do not like the look of
15906 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15918 \begin_inset space ~
15928 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15929 \begin_inset space ~
15932 serif and typewriter fonts,
15936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15937 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15945 \begin_inset space ~
15954 for sans serif text),
15955 or different shapes of the same font,
15957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15961 \begin_inset space \space{}
15969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15973 \begin_inset space \space{}
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15987 \begin_inset space ~
15997 but you can also select your own.
15998 \begin_inset Newline newline
16001 The differences between roman,
16005 \begin_inset space ~
16014 fonts are explained in section
16015 \begin_inset space ~
16019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16021 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16027 \begin_inset Newline newline
16033 \begin_inset space ~
16038 was originally designed for newspapers.
16039 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16043 \begin_inset space ~
16048 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16051 \begin_layout Standard
16052 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16068 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16073 depends on the class you are using.
16074 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16077 \begin_layout Standard
16078 Note that the font size is the
16083 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16084 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16086 and subscripts) by this value.
16087 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16090 \begin_inset space ~
16096 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16097 \begin_inset space ~
16101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16103 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16111 \begin_layout Standard
16115 \begin_inset space ~
16120 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16122 \begin_inset space ~
16125 serif or typewriter.
16130 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16131 the other selections override this.
16142 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16145 \begin_layout Standard
16150 LaTeX font encoding
16152 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16158 \begin_inset Index idx
16163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16166 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16183 \begin_inset space ~
16187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16189 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16198 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16199 Unless you have specific reasons,
16201 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16205 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16213 \begin_layout Standard
16217 Use Old Style Figures
16221 Use True Small Caps
16224 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16227 Use Old Style Figures
16230 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16231 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16239 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16240 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16243 Use True Small Caps
16245 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16246 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16247 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16248 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16252 \begin_layout Standard
16254 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16257 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16262 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16268 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16274 \begin_layout Standard
16279 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16281 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16286 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16292 \begin_inset Index idx
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16300 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16314 So this has no effect for the document language
16330 \begin_layout Standard
16333 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16335 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16341 \begin_inset Index idx
16346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16349 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16367 \begin_layout Standard
16370 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16372 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16377 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16379 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16385 instead of ligatures (--,
16387 \begin_inset space ~
16391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16393 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16404 \begin_layout Standard
16405 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16409 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16418 When you choose a new font or font size,
16424 change the screen font!
16425 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16426 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16428 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16435 \begin_inset space ~
16439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16441 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16454 \begin_layout Subsection
16458 \begin_layout Standard
16459 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16460 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16461 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16462 fonts for your document,
16463 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16465 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16469 \begin_inset Index idx
16474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16476 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16491 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16492 automatically selects a math font.
16493 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16494 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16495 's default font family
16496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16502 \begin_inset space ~
16508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16513 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16516 \begin_layout Standard
16517 Note that the math font will not be used for
16521 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16527 or by the insertion of the command
16534 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16535 \begin_inset space ~
16539 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16541 \begin_inset space ~
16544 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16547 \begin_inset space ~
16555 \begin_inset space ~
16560 in the document font settings.
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16565 fonts for the document,
16566 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16567 font (in most cases
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16583 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16584 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16591 \begin_inset space ~
16597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16603 \begin_layout Subsection
16605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16615 name "subsec:charstyles"
16622 \begin_inset Index idx
16627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16634 \begin_inset Index idx
16639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16648 \begin_layout Standard
16649 As we've already seen,
16651 automatically changes the
16652 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16655 style for certain paragraph environments.
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16659 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16660 This is where we meet the concept of
16666 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16668 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16680 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16682 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16696 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16707 available with all document classes.
16709 some document classes and modules provide
16713 for specific purposes.
16714 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16717 \begin_layout Standard
16719 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16722 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16731 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16736 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16737 you selected it and chose e.
16738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16759 encourage the use of
16771 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16773 \begin_inset space ~
16777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16779 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16785 Rather than fiddling with
16790 they encourage the use of
16795 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16801 \begin_inset Quotes els
16805 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16810 \begin_inset Quotes els
16814 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16818 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16820 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16821 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16822 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16823 On a more practical level,
16824 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16825 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16830 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16837 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16838 With a semantic markup (such as
16844 you'd just need to change the definition of
16849 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16852 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16853 using different markup semantics.
16856 \begin_layout Standard
16858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16860 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16869 Builtin Text Styles
16870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16872 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16879 \begin_layout Standard
16881 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16882 The two builtin text styles can be
16883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16887 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16891 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16892 both of these styles
16895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16899 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16901 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16910 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16924 do one of the following:
16927 \begin_layout Itemize
16928 click on the toolbar button
16937 \begin_layout Itemize
16938 use the key binding
16945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16949 \begin_layout Itemize
16951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16955 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16957 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16959 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16967 arg "dialog-show character"
16971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16975 arg "dialog-show character"
16979 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16980 as described in section
16981 \begin_inset space ~
16985 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16987 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16993 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
17003 \begin_layout Standard
17005 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17007 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17011 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17015 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17017 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17021 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17030 style is already active,
17031 they deactivate it.
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17035 One typically uses the
17039 style for proper names.
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17049 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17055 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17059 \begin_layout Standard
17061 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17067 is producing text in
17072 but the definition can be changed.
17077 \begin_layout Standard
17079 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17081 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17089 You can activate (or deactivate —
17090 it's also a toggle) the
17097 \begin_layout Itemize
17098 clicking on the toolbar button
17107 \begin_layout Itemize
17108 using the keybindings
17115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17119 \begin_layout Itemize
17121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17125 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17127 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17137 arg "dialog-show character"
17141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17145 arg "dialog-show character"
17149 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17150 as described in section
17151 \begin_inset space ~
17155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17157 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17163 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17173 \begin_layout Standard
17178 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17180 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17182 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17185 packages use a different font
17186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17188 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17194 \begin_layout Standard
17195 We've been using the
17199 style all over the place in this document.
17200 Here's one more example:
17203 \begin_layout Quotation
17207 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17209 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17216 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17217 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17218 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17219 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17220 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17227 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17233 \begin_layout Standard
17235 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17236 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17237 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17245 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17248 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17255 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17257 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17269 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17271 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17281 arg "dialog-show character"
17287 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17289 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17295 arg "dialog-show character"
17299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17309 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17316 \begin_layout Standard
17318 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17319 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17320 a module (see section
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17327 reference "subsec:Modules"
17336 or local layout settings (see section
17337 \begin_inset space ~
17341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17343 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17349 As the two builtin styles,
17354 markup for specific functions.
17361 module that provides,
17362 among other things,
17363 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17375 \begin_inset Quotes els
17379 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17385 \begin_layout Standard
17387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17388 These styles can be found,
17392 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17394 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17402 \begin_layout Standard
17404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17405 For the purpose of demonstration,
17406 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17410 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17411 By example of the emphasized style,
17412 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17417 appears as normal font change,
17418 the custom text style
17419 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17424 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17432 appears as an inset,
17433 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17434 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17436 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17438 \begin_inset Flex Code
17441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17443 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17453 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17458 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17468 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17473 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17482 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17487 \begin_layout Subsection
17489 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17501 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17511 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17517 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17522 \begin_inset Index idx
17527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17536 \begin_layout Standard
17537 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17542 so \SpecialChar LyX
17544 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17546 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17551 the properties of text passages
17552 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17557 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17559 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17560 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17564 \begin_layout Standard
17566 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17567 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17569 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17570 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17575 comes in as a last resort.
17580 \begin_layout Standard
17581 Before we document how to
17582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17583 use custom character style
17584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17585 tweak the text properties
17588 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17592 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17597 \begin_inset Newline newline
17600 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17603 \begin_layout Standard
17605 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17606 use custom character styles
17607 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17608 tweak text properties
17612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17615 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17617 \begin_inset space ~
17620 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17628 arg "dialog-show character"
17631 dialog or press the toolbar button
17634 arg "dialog-show character"
17639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17642 boxes in this dialog,
17643 each corresponding to a different
17644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17649 property that you can choose.
17650 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17660 which keeps the current state of that property.
17662 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17668 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17673 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17674 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17677 \begin_layout Standard
17679 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17681 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17685 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17687 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17691 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17693 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17699 and their options (in addition to
17702 \begin_inset space ~
17708 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17720 \begin_layout Labeling
17721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17735 The possible options are:
17739 \begin_layout Labeling
17740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17745 This is the Roman font family.
17746 Normally a serif font.
17747 It's also the default family.
17757 \begin_layout Labeling
17758 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17769 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17781 \begin_layout Labeling
17782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17789 This is the Typewriter font family.
17795 arg "font-typewriter"
17801 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17805 \begin_layout Standard
17807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17808 The general differences of these families are:
17811 \begin_layout Itemize
17813 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17818 fonts use characters with serifs.
17819 These are the small
17820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17827 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17828 The following example shows the difference:
17829 \begin_inset Newline newline
17833 \begin_inset Newline newline
17838 text without serifs
17841 \begin_inset Newline newline
17844 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17845 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17852 \begin_layout Itemize
17854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17859 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17860 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17861 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17864 \begin_layout Itemize
17866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17880 which means every character has the same width;
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17899 \begin_inset Newline newline
17903 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17908 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17921 \begin_inset Note Note
17924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17926 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17927 For more on phantoms see section
17928 \begin_inset space ~
17932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17934 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17945 \begin_inset Newline newline
17954 \begin_layout Labeling
17955 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17960 This corresponds to the print weight.
17965 \begin_layout Labeling
17966 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17971 This is the Medium font series.
17972 It's also the default series.
17975 \begin_layout Labeling
17976 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17983 This is the Bold font series.
17996 \begin_layout Labeling
17997 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18002 As the name implies.
18007 \begin_layout Labeling
18008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18013 This is the Upright font shape.
18014 It's also the default shape.
18017 \begin_layout Labeling
18018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18028 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18038 s the Italic font shape
18044 \begin_layout Labeling
18045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18052 This is the Slanted font shape
18054 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18056 this is different from italic).
18059 \begin_layout Labeling
18060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18064 \begin_inset space ~
18071 This is the Small caps font shape
18078 \begin_layout Labeling
18079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18081 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18086 Alters the text color.
18087 Note that not all DVI
18088 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18090 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18091 viewers are able to display colors.
18095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18097 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18105 which means that the document default color set in
18107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18114 \begin_inset space ~
18121 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18123 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18125 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18127 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18222 \begin_inset Index idx
18227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18229 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18244 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18250 \begin_layout Labeling
18251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18253 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18258 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18259 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18260 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18261 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18262 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18264 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18266 \begin_inset Newline newline
18269 If you have for example,
18270 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18272 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18273 When using the spell checking (see section
18274 \begin_inset space ~
18278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18280 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18285 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18286 \begin_inset Newline newline
18289 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18292 Exclude from Spellchecking
18295 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18300 \begin_layout Labeling
18301 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18306 Alters the size of the font.
18308 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18314 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18317 numerical values here;
18318 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18320 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18322 but a general description of what you want to do.
18327 \begin_layout Labeling
18328 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18349 arg "font-size tiny"
18355 \begin_layout Labeling
18356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18377 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18383 \begin_layout Labeling
18384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18405 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18411 \begin_layout Labeling
18412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18433 arg "font-size small"
18439 \begin_layout Labeling
18440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18454 It's also the default size.
18458 arg "font-size normal"
18464 \begin_layout Labeling
18465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18486 arg "font-size large"
18492 \begin_layout Labeling
18493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18514 arg "font-size larger"
18520 \begin_layout Labeling
18521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18542 arg "font-size largest"
18548 \begin_layout Labeling
18549 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18570 arg "font-size huge"
18576 \begin_layout Labeling
18577 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18598 arg "font-size giant"
18604 \begin_layout Labeling
18605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18610 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18631 arg "font-size increase"
18637 \begin_layout Labeling
18638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18643 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18664 arg "font-size decrease"
18670 \begin_layout Standard
18676 don't go crazy with this feature.
18677 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18679 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18681 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18682 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18687 \begin_layout Standard
18689 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18690 Another combo box allows to tweak
18697 \begin_layout Labeling
18698 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18700 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18705 Alters the text color.
18706 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18712 which means that the document default color set in
18714 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18715 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18721 \begin_inset space ~
18821 \begin_inset Index idx
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18832 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18837 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18855 \begin_layout Labeling
18856 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18858 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18868 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18869 change a few other things at the character level
18870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18871 have text passages being underlined
18875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18876 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18877 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18878 when you could not change fonts.
18879 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18880 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18881 because some people
18885 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18892 \begin_layout Labeling
18893 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18902 This is text with emphasize on
18905 This might seem like the same as
18910 but it is actually a bit different.
18916 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18917 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18922 \begin_layout Labeling
18923 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18930 Don't use underlining.
18935 \begin_layout Labeling
18936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18938 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18950 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18952 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18961 arg "font-underline"
18967 \begin_inset Newline newline
18971 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18974 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18975 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18976 when you could not change fonts.
18977 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18978 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18979 because some people
18983 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18988 \begin_layout Labeling
18989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18993 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18995 \begin_inset space ~
19004 This is text with Double under
19005 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19016 arg "font-underunderline"
19020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19022 \begin_inset Newline newline
19025 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19026 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19031 \begin_layout Labeling
19032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19036 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19038 \begin_inset space ~
19047 This is text with Wavy under
19048 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19050 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19059 arg "font-underwave"
19063 \begin_inset Newline newline
19066 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19067 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19073 \begin_layout Labeling
19074 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19081 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19087 \begin_layout Labeling
19088 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19095 Don't use strikethrough.
19098 \begin_layout Labeling
19099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19103 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19105 \begin_inset space ~
19109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19120 Single strikethrough
19128 arg "font-strikeout"
19132 \begin_inset Newline newline
19135 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19138 \begin_layout Labeling
19139 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19141 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19145 \begin_inset space ~
19149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19151 \begin_inset space ~
19155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19163 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19165 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19171 \begin_inset Newline newline
19174 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19178 \begin_layout Standard
19180 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19181 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19184 \begin_layout Labeling
19185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19187 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19192 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19193 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19194 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19195 \begin_inset Newline newline
19198 If you have for example,
19199 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19201 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19202 When using the spell checking (see section
19203 \begin_inset space ~
19207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19209 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19214 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19215 \begin_inset Newline newline
19218 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19221 Exclude from Spellchecking
19224 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19230 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19231 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19232 \begin_inset space ~
19236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19238 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19244 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19254 \begin_layout Itemize
19256 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19264 This is text with emphasize on
19269 \begin_layout Itemize
19273 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19281 This is text with Noun on.
19283 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19291 this is a logical attribute.
19292 Normally it's equivalent to
19295 \begin_inset space ~
19305 \begin_layout Standard
19306 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19307 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19314 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19315 chosen a new character style
19316 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19317 applied a text property
19320 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19323 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19325 \begin_inset space ~
19328 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19336 arg "dialog-show character"
19342 arg "dialog-show character"
19347 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19351 You can activate the
19352 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19354 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19355 last applied properties
19357 by using the toolbar button
19360 arg "textstyle-apply"
19364 The button lets you apply
19365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19366 your custom character style
19367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19370 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19372 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19373 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19374 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19375 20) most recently applied settings,
19376 from which you can select one.
19381 \begin_layout Standard
19382 To completely reset the
19383 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19385 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19386 text properties of a selection
19390 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19392 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19402 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19407 from the menu of the toolbar button
19410 arg "textstyle-apply"
19417 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19418 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19438 \begin_inset space ~
19452 \begin_layout Standard
19454 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19455 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19463 \begin_inset space ~
19476 \begin_layout Itemize
19478 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19492 which means every character has the same width;
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19511 \begin_inset Newline newline
19515 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19529 \begin_inset Note Note
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 For more on phantoms see section
19534 \begin_inset space ~
19538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19540 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19551 \begin_inset Newline newline
19557 \begin_layout Itemize
19559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19564 fonts use characters with serifs.
19565 These are the small
19566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19573 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19574 The following example shows the difference:
19575 \begin_inset Newline newline
19579 \begin_inset Newline newline
19584 text without serifs
19587 \begin_inset Newline newline
19590 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19591 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19598 \begin_layout Itemize
19600 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19605 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19606 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19607 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19612 \begin_layout Standard
19614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19622 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19623 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19626 \begin_inset space ~
19632 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19635 apply a style with properties A,
19636 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19639 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19640 the text ends up with properties A,
19644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19659 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19660 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19669 toggling behavior is up to you.
19673 \begin_inset space ~
19679 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19713 \begin_inset space ~
19719 then apply the style to bold face text,
19720 the text will revert to the default series (
19721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19729 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19734 \begin_layout Standard
19736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19739 with the same warning once again:
19740 Do not overuse the fonts!
19742 more often than not,
19743 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19746 \begin_layout Section
19747 Printing and Previewing
19750 \begin_layout Subsection
19754 \begin_layout Standard
19755 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19757 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19758 Before we tell you that,
19759 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19760 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19762 Additional Features
19767 \begin_layout Standard
19769 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19772 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19773 typesetting system,
19774 but to prevent confusion,
19775 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19778 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19781 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19782 to turn your writing into printable output.
19783 This happens in two stages:
19786 \begin_layout Enumerate
19789 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19791 generating a file with the extension,
19793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19807 \begin_layout Enumerate
19810 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19811 to use the commands in the
19815 file to produce printable output.
19818 \begin_layout Subsection
19819 Output file formats
19820 \begin_inset Index idx
19825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19834 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19843 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19845 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19849 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19853 \begin_inset Index idx
19858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19860 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19865 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19867 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19883 \begin_layout Standard
19884 This file type has the extension
19885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19897 It contains your document as plain text
19898 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19900 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19901 following the rules of the
19902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19905 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19914 \begin_layout Standard
19915 You can export your document to
19916 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19918 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19923 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19924 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19926 \begin_inset space ~
19933 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19934 bibliography (section
19935 \begin_inset space ~
19939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19941 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19947 If your document includes such material,
19950 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19951 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19953 \begin_inset space ~
19957 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_inset space ~
19969 \begin_inset space ~
19973 \begin_inset space ~
19979 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19980 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19982 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19991 \begin_inset Index idx
19996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20016 \begin_layout Standard
20017 This file type has the extension
20018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20029 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20030 program to process your document.
20031 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20033 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20034 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20035 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20036 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20037 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20040 \begin_layout Standard
20041 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20042 -file using the menu
20044 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20045 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20049 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20050 export variants are explained in section
20051 \begin_inset space ~
20055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20057 reference "subsec:Export"
20065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20067 \begin_inset Index idx
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20074 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 \begin_layout Standard
20092 This file type has the extension
20093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20114 because it is completely portable;
20115 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20116 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20120 \begin_layout Standard
20121 DVI files do not contain images,
20122 they only link to them.
20123 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20124 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20125 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20126 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20129 \begin_layout Standard
20130 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20132 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20133 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20138 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20139 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20141 \begin_inset space ~
20147 The latter option uses the program
20149 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20155 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20158 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20159 \begin_inset space ~
20163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20165 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20171 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20172 is still a work in progress,
20173 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20179 \begin_inset Index idx
20184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20186 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20203 \begin_layout Standard
20204 This file type has the extension
20205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20217 PostScript was developed by the company
20221 as a printer language.
20222 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20223 PostScript can be seen as a
20224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20227 programming language
20228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20232 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20238 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20244 \begin_inset Index idx
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20252 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 As a result of this,
20272 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20275 \begin_layout Standard
20276 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20280 Encapsulated PostScript
20281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20298 As \SpecialChar LyX
20299 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20300 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20304 \begin_inset space ~
20307 images in your document,
20310 \begin_inset space ~
20313 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20314 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20316 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20317 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20320 \begin_layout Standard
20321 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20323 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20324 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20330 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20332 \begin_inset Index idx
20337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20354 \begin_inset Index idx
20359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20368 \begin_layout Standard
20369 This file type has the extension
20370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20386 Portable Document Format
20387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20394 was derived from PostScript.
20395 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20405 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20408 \begin_layout Standard
20409 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20413 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20446 Portable Network Graphics
20447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20464 You can also use any other image format,
20465 because \SpecialChar LyX
20466 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20467 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20468 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20469 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20472 \begin_layout Standard
20473 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20475 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20481 \begin_layout Description
20483 \begin_inset space ~
20486 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20490 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20493 \begin_layout Description
20495 \begin_inset space ~
20502 ) This uses the program
20504 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20507 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20510 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20519 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20520 \begin_inset space ~
20524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20526 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20532 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20533 is still a work in progress,
20534 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20538 \begin_layout Description
20540 \begin_inset space ~
20547 ) This uses the program
20552 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20558 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20559 \begin_inset space ~
20563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20565 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20571 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20573 vertically written Japanese.
20576 \begin_layout Description
20578 \begin_inset space ~
20581 (cropped) This is the same as
20584 \begin_inset space ~
20589 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20590 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20591 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20594 \begin_layout Description
20596 \begin_inset space ~
20599 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20603 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20606 \begin_layout Description
20608 \begin_inset space ~
20611 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20615 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20616 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20620 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20621 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20624 \begin_layout Standard
20628 \begin_inset space ~
20637 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20640 and works without problems.
20641 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20642 or specific OpenType fonts,
20643 you might want to try out
20646 \begin_inset space ~
20654 \begin_inset space ~
20660 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20669 \begin_inset Index idx
20674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20676 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 \begin_inset Index idx
20696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20705 \begin_layout Standard
20706 This file type has the extension
20707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20719 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20720 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20721 When \SpecialChar LyX
20723 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20724 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20727 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20730 between different formats,
20731 which are described in section
20733 Math Output in XHTML
20738 \begin_inset space ~
20746 \begin_layout Standard
20747 XHTML output remains
20748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20756 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20757 features are supported yet.
20761 and the World Wide Web
20766 Additional Features
20769 for more information.
20772 \begin_layout Standard
20773 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20776 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20782 \begin_layout Subsection
20784 \begin_inset Index idx
20789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20808 \begin_layout Standard
20809 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20810 with all of the page breaks in place,
20811 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20821 or use the toolbar button
20828 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20829 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20830 \begin_inset space ~
20834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20836 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20841 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20842 \begin_inset space ~
20846 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20848 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20854 Further output formats can be selected via
20856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20857 View (Other Formats)
20859 or the toolbar button
20868 \begin_layout Standard
20869 If you have changed your document,
20870 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20872 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20878 Update (Other Formats)
20884 \begin_layout Standard
20885 When you preview a file,
20886 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20887 's temporary directory.
20888 To have a real output,
20889 export your document.
20892 \begin_layout Section
20893 A few Words about Typography
20894 \begin_inset Index idx
20899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 \begin_layout Subsection
20910 Dashes and Minus Signs
20911 \begin_inset Index idx
20916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20923 \begin_inset Index idx
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20937 \begin_layout Standard
20938 In \SpecialChar LyX
20941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20952 symbol comes in four variants:
20973 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20979 \begin_layout Standard
20980 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20990 height_special "totalheight"
20995 backgroundcolor "none"
20998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20999 \begin_inset Tabular
21000 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
21001 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21002 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21003 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21004 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21005 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21006 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21035 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21074 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21075 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 system key combination
21101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21103 the en dash is entered with
21106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21115 and the em dash with
21118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21131 is the Mac label for the right
21141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21154 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 system key combination or
21179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21245 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21251 \begin_layout Standard
21252 Dashes can also be inserted with
21254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21256 \begin_inset space ~
21259 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21267 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21270 \begin_layout Standard
21271 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21272 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21273 Here are some examples:
21276 \begin_layout Enumerate
21277 line- and page-breaks
21278 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21288 \begin_layout Enumerate
21291 \begin_inset space ~
21295 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21305 \begin_layout Enumerate
21306 The em dash is used without spaces:
21309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21319 \begin_layout Enumerate
21320 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21324 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21334 \begin_layout Standard
21336 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21338 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21339 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21347 \begin_layout Subsection
21348 Dashes and Line Breaks
21349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21351 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21358 \begin_layout Standard
21359 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21367 \begin_layout Itemize
21369 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21370 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21373 \begin_layout Itemize
21375 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21378 \begin_layout Itemize
21379 In French and Spanish,
21380 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21381 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21384 \begin_layout Standard
21386 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21387 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21398 allows line breaks after hyphens
21399 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21402 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21405 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21408 \begin_layout Enumerate
21409 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21410 \begin_inset space ~
21413 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21415 The Elements of Typographic Style
21418 \begin_inset space ~
21421 – can be prevented using
21422 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21424 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21430 \begin_layout Enumerate
21431 Unwanted line breaks
21436 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21438 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21441 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21448 Prevent Hyphenation
21453 \begin_inset space ~
21469 in \SpecialChar TeX
21471 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21474 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21476 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21478 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21479 space does not suffice
21483 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21490 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21491 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21492 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21505 \begin_layout Itemize
21507 \begin_inset space ~
21511 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21521 height_special "totalheight"
21526 backgroundcolor "none"
21529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 \begin_layout Itemize
21540 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21550 height_special "totalheight"
21555 backgroundcolor "none"
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 \begin_inset space ~
21568 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21569 \begin_inset space ~
21572 – sont très utiles.
21575 \begin_layout Itemize
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21590 un inciso con rayas—
21595 \begin_layout Standard
21596 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21597 \begin_inset space ~
21600 – in contrast to an overfull line
21601 \begin_inset space ~
21604 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21608 \begin_layout Standard
21609 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21610 you can select the option
21612 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21613 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21614 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21615 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21620 \begin_layout Enumerate
21621 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21622 They can be prevented using
21623 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21625 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21628 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21634 \begin_layout Itemize
21636 \begin_inset space ~
21639 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21640 \begin_inset space ~
21643 – sont très utiles.
21647 \begin_layout Enumerate
21648 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21649 \begin_inset Newline newline
21654 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21655 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21657 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21659 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21661 \begin_inset space ~
21667 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21669 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21671 \begin_inset space ~
21682 \begin_layout Itemize
21683 Em-dashes without spaces—
21684 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21685 common in American English—
21686 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21687 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21690 \begin_layout Standard
21691 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21692 \begin_inset space ~
21696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21698 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21710 \begin_layout Enumerate
21713 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21714 \begin_inset space ~
21718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21720 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21732 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21735 \begin_layout Standard
21736 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21738 \begin_inset space ~
21742 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21751 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21759 \begin_layout Standard
21760 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21762 \begin_inset space ~
21766 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21767 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21776 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21781 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 The behavior was changed since
21791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21809 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21810 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21818 \begin_layout Standard
21821 \begin_inset space ~
21829 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21831 \begin_inset space ~
21834 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21839 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21840 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21842 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21847 If you used both literal and
21848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21855 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21857 \begin_inset space ~
21861 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21864 \begin_layout Subsection
21866 \begin_inset Index idx
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21880 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21887 \begin_layout Standard
21888 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21889 but automatically in the output.
21890 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21896 \begin_inset Index idx
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21918 following the rules of the document language.
21920 does not hyphenate text in the
21924 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21927 \begin_layout Standard
21929 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21930 it only has problems with text in the
21934 font and with unusual constructs,
21936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21944 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21945 cannot break a word correctly,
21946 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21947 This is done with the menu
21949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21950 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21952 \begin_inset space ~
21959 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21960 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
21961 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
21963 \change_inserted -712698321 1697436627
21966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21973 that are common in word processors,
21975 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21977 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420769
21979 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420770
21983 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420699
21985 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420772
21988 hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21990 If no hyphenation is necessary
21991 \change_inserted -712698321 1697437057
21992 or the automatic hyphenation is disabled
21997 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420971
22001 \begin_layout Standard
22003 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22004 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
22005 does not hyphenate correctly,
22006 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
22007 how to hyphenate it by adding
22008 \change_deleted -712698321 1697438612
22010 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438615
22012 \change_deleted -712698321 1697439121
22014 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22016 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439144
22018 \begin_inset Flex Code
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440886
22026 hyphenation{<patterns>}
22034 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22036 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438635
22037 which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen
22038 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22041 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438465
22043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22047 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22050 \begin_inset Flex Code
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22058 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion
22059 \change_inserted -712698321 1697438644
22061 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22070 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439035
22071 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
22073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22078 \begin_inset Flex Code
22081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439080
22086 hyphenation{unbroken}
22094 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22096 If there are a lot of these
22097 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439099
22098 hyphenation exceptions
22099 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22101 you can collect them in a single file (say,
22103 \begin_inset Flex Code
22106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421096
22116 ) and then import the file via:
22118 \begin_inset Flex Code
22121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22123 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421113
22126 usepackage{myhyphens}
22134 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
22136 \change_inserted -712698321 1697439496
22139 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
22147 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
22149 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440371
22153 \begin_layout Standard
22155 \change_inserted -712698321 1697456279
22157 \begin_inset Flex Code
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 \change_inserted -712698321 1697440909
22165 hyphenation{<patterns>}
22172 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
22173 this is usually the main language of the document).
22174 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
22175 the language packages
22183 provide specific variants of the command:
22186 \begin_layout Itemize
22188 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441197
22195 \begin_inset Flex Code
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441197
22203 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
22216 \begin_layout Itemize
22218 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441204
22225 \begin_inset Flex Code
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22230 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441204
22233 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
22243 \begin_layout Standard
22245 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441248
22247 depending on which language package you are using:
22250 \begin_layout Itemize
22252 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441311
22253 \begin_inset Flex Code
22256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22258 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441767
22261 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
22262 \begin_inset Newline newline
22265 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
22275 \begin_layout Itemize
22277 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441342
22278 \begin_inset Flex Code
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22283 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441342
22286 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
22298 \begin_layout Standard
22300 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441379
22301 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
22305 \begin_layout Itemize
22307 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441467
22308 \begin_inset Flex Code
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441467
22316 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
22326 \begin_layout Itemize
22328 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441476
22329 \begin_inset Flex Code
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22334 \change_inserted -712698321 1697441476
22337 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
22347 \begin_layout Standard
22349 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442003
22350 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
22353 \begin_layout Standard
22355 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442124
22356 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
22357 which is usually after the user preamble.
22358 So it is advised that you embrace them in
22359 \begin_inset Flex Code
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 \change_inserted -712698321 1697442087
22367 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
22376 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
22380 \begin_layout Standard
22381 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
22382 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
22383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22392 would then see the hyphen
22393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22400 as a line break possibility.
22401 A line break at this point would look ugly.
22402 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
22404 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
22406 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
22411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22413 \change_inserted 244031559 1699481895
22415 \change_deleted 244031559 1699481900
22418 \SpecialChar menuseparator
22420 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
22422 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22427 ) or put it into a makebox as described in
22428 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421188
22433 Prevent Hyphenation
22438 \begin_inset space ~
22446 \begin_layout Subsection
22448 \begin_inset Index idx
22453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22463 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22466 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22473 \begin_layout Standard
22474 When \SpecialChar LyX
22475 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22476 to generate the final version of your document,
22478 automatically distinguishes between words,
22483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22486 appropriate amount of space.
22487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22490 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22491 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22494 \begin_layout Standard
22496 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22509 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22510 it's the end of a sentence;
22511 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22512 it's an abbreviation.
22515 \begin_layout Standard
22516 Here are some examples of
22520 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22523 \begin_layout Itemize
22528 \begin_layout Itemize
22533 \begin_layout Standard
22534 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22537 \begin_layout Itemize
22539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22543 this is too much space!
22546 \begin_layout Itemize
22551 \begin_layout Standard
22552 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22555 \begin_layout Standard
22556 To fix this problem,
22557 use one of the following:
22560 \begin_layout Enumerate
22564 \begin_inset space ~
22569 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22570 \begin_inset space ~
22574 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22578 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22584 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22588 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22596 \begin_inset Index idx
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22620 \begin_layout Enumerate
22624 \begin_inset space ~
22629 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22630 \begin_inset space ~
22634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22636 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22642 \begin_inset Index idx
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22649 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22666 \begin_layout Enumerate
22670 \begin_inset space ~
22674 \begin_inset space ~
22678 \begin_inset space ~
22685 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22687 \begin_inset space ~
22692 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22693 This function is also bound to
22696 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22702 \begin_layout Standard
22703 With the corrections,
22704 our earlier examples look like this:
22707 \begin_layout Itemize
22709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22713 \begin_inset space \space{}
22716 this is too much space!
22719 \begin_layout Itemize
22720 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22724 \begin_layout Standard
22725 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22726 If your language is such a language,
22727 you don't need to worry,
22728 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22729 will take care of this.
22732 \begin_layout Standard
22733 For those that do need to bother,
22734 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22738 \begin_inset space ~
22744 feature described in the section
22746 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22751 Additional Features
22756 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22758 \begin_inset Index idx
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22765 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 \begin_inset Index idx
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22804 \begin_layout Standard
22806 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22808 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22809 and use a closing mark at the end.
22812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22820 The keyboard character,
22826 generates this automatically.
22829 \begin_layout Standard
22830 You can specify what character the
22834 key produces by using the submenu
22840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22844 \begin_inset Index idx
22849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 dialog and switching the
22869 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22870 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22872 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22874 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22878 \begin_inset space ~
22884 \begin_layout Labeling
22885 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22897 \begin_inset space ~
22901 \begin_inset space ~
22905 \begin_inset Quotes els
22909 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22923 \begin_inset Quotes els
22927 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22930 quotation marks (as common,
22932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22939 \begin_layout Labeling
22940 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22943 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22947 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22951 \begin_inset space ~
22955 \begin_inset space ~
22959 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22963 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22969 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22973 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22977 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22981 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22984 quotation marks (as common,
22986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22993 \begin_layout Labeling
22994 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22997 \begin_inset Quotes gld
23001 \begin_inset Quotes grd
23005 \begin_inset space ~
23009 \begin_inset space ~
23013 \begin_inset Quotes gls
23017 \begin_inset Quotes grs
23023 \begin_inset Quotes gld
23027 \begin_inset Quotes grd
23031 \begin_inset Quotes gls
23035 \begin_inset Quotes grs
23038 quotation marks (as common,
23040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23047 \begin_layout Labeling
23048 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23051 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23055 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23059 \begin_inset space ~
23063 \begin_inset space ~
23067 \begin_inset Quotes pls
23071 \begin_inset Quotes prs
23077 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23081 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23085 \begin_inset Quotes pls
23089 \begin_inset Quotes prs
23092 quotation marks (as common,
23094 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23101 \begin_layout Labeling
23102 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23105 \begin_inset Quotes cld
23109 \begin_inset Quotes crd
23113 \begin_inset space ~
23117 \begin_inset space ~
23121 \begin_inset Quotes cls
23125 \begin_inset Quotes crs
23131 \begin_inset Quotes cld
23135 \begin_inset Quotes crd
23139 \begin_inset Quotes cls
23143 \begin_inset Quotes crs
23146 quotation marks (as common,
23148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23155 \begin_layout Labeling
23156 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23159 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23163 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23167 \begin_inset space ~
23171 \begin_inset space ~
23175 \begin_inset Quotes als
23179 \begin_inset Quotes ars
23185 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23189 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23193 \begin_inset Quotes als
23197 \begin_inset Quotes ars
23200 quotation marks (as common,
23202 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23209 \begin_layout Labeling
23210 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23213 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23217 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23225 \begin_inset space ~
23229 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23233 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23239 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23243 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
23247 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23251 \begin_inset Quotes qls
23254 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
23257 \begin_layout Labeling
23258 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23261 \begin_inset Quotes bld
23265 \begin_inset Quotes brd
23269 \begin_inset space ~
23273 \begin_inset space ~
23277 \begin_inset Quotes bls
23281 \begin_inset Quotes brs
23287 \begin_inset Quotes bld
23291 \begin_inset Quotes brd
23295 \begin_inset Quotes bls
23299 \begin_inset Quotes brs
23302 quotation marks (as common,
23304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23311 \begin_layout Labeling
23312 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23315 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23319 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23323 \begin_inset space ~
23327 \begin_inset space ~
23331 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23335 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23341 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23345 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23349 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23353 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23356 quotation marks (as common,
23358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23365 \begin_layout Labeling
23366 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23369 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23373 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23377 \begin_inset space ~
23381 \begin_inset space ~
23385 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23389 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23395 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23399 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23403 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23407 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23410 quotation marks (another style common in France)
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23415 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
23416 since these look identical to the inner marks.
23417 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
23425 \begin_layout Labeling
23426 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23429 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23433 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23437 \begin_inset space ~
23441 \begin_inset space ~
23445 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23449 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23455 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23459 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23463 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23467 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23470 quotation marks (as common,
23472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23479 \begin_layout Labeling
23480 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23483 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23487 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23491 \begin_inset space ~
23495 \begin_inset space ~
23499 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23503 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23509 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23513 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23517 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23521 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23524 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23525 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23529 \begin_layout Labeling
23530 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23532 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23535 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23539 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23543 \begin_inset space ~
23547 \begin_inset space ~
23551 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23555 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23563 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23571 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23579 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23587 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23592 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23597 \begin_layout Labeling
23598 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23599 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23607 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23613 \begin_inset space ~
23617 \begin_inset space ~
23623 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23631 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23635 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23639 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23643 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23647 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23650 quotation marks (as common,
23652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23662 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23663 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23665 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23671 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23679 \begin_layout Labeling
23680 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23681 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23689 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23695 \begin_inset space ~
23699 \begin_inset space ~
23705 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23713 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23717 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23721 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23725 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23729 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23732 quotation marks (as common,
23734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23738 in North Korea and China)
23739 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23741 \begin_inset script superscript
23743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23745 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23748 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23764 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23776 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963146
23780 \begin_layout Labeling
23781 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23783 \change_inserted 1064312605 1704105142
23786 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23790 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23794 \begin_inset space ~
23798 \begin_inset space ~
23802 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23806 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23812 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23818 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23824 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23830 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23835 quotation marks (as common in Israel)
23840 \begin_layout Standard
23841 Inner quotation marks
23845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 In many writing cultures,
23847 these are single quotation marks.
23848 But as the British and French styles show,
23849 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23857 does not necessarily mean
23858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23866 This is why we call them
23867 \begin_inset Quotes els
23871 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23887 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23889 \begin_inset Quotes els
23893 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23896 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23899 arg "quote-insert inner"
23904 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23910 \begin_layout Standard
23912 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23914 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23915 even if the document-wide style changes.
23916 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23917 If you check the setting
23919 Use dynamic quotation marks
23923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23924 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23929 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23930 they appear in a special color).
23931 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23932 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23937 if your publisher requests a different style).
23940 \begin_layout Standard
23941 Individual quotation marks (i.
23942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23946 their level [inner,
23950 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23953 \begin_layout Subsection
23955 \begin_inset Index idx
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 \begin_inset Index idx
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23984 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24001 name "subsec:Ligatures"
24008 \begin_layout Standard
24009 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
24010 These groups are known as
24015 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
24016 knows about ligatures,
24017 your documents will contain them too in the output.
24018 Here are the standard ligatures:
24021 \begin_layout Itemize
24025 \begin_layout Itemize
24029 \begin_layout Itemize
24033 \begin_layout Itemize
24037 \begin_layout Itemize
24041 \begin_layout Standard
24042 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
24045 \begin_layout Standard
24047 you don't want a ligature in a word.
24048 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
24050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24057 it looks really weird in compound words,
24059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24074 To break a ligature,
24077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24078 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
24080 \begin_inset space ~
24087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24098 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
24100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24115 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
24117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24123 \begin_layout Subsection
24125 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
24127 \begin_inset Index idx
24132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24152 \begin_layout Standard
24155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24156 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
24161 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
24164 \begin_layout Description
24166 The name of the game.
24169 \begin_layout Description
24171 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
24175 \begin_layout Description
24177 The \SpecialChar TeX
24178 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
24182 \begin_layout Description
24183 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
24184 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24188 \begin_layout Standard
24189 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24195 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
24199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24203 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
24204 world to give programs geek version numbers.
24205 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
24206 converges to the number
24207 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
24211 The actual version is
24212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24221 the previous one was
24222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24233 \begin_layout Subsection
24235 \begin_inset Index idx
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 \begin_layout Standard
24260 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
24261 As you can see in the example below,
24262 it looks better when the space is smaller.
24264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24271 for units use the menu
24273 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24274 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
24276 \begin_inset space ~
24284 arg "space-insert thin"
24290 \begin_layout Standard
24291 Here is an example to show the differences:
24294 \begin_layout Standard
24295 \begin_inset Tabular
24296 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
24297 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24298 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
24299 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
24301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24306 \begin_inset space ~
24310 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24322 space between number and unit
24329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24338 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24350 half space between number and unit
24363 \begin_layout Subsection
24365 \begin_inset Index idx
24370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24389 \begin_layout Standard
24390 In the early days of word processors,
24391 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
24392 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
24393 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
24394 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
24395 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
24396 These bits of text became known as
24407 \begin_layout Standard
24410 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
24411 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
24412 But what about widows and orphans,
24413 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
24414 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
24415 governing page breaks,
24416 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
24417 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
24418 you can add the commands
24419 \begin_inset Newline newline
24427 \begin_inset Newline newline
24435 \begin_inset Newline newline
24438 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24439 preamble of your document to avoid them.
24440 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
24442 \begin_inset space ~
24446 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24448 key "latexcompanion"
24454 \begin_inset space ~
24458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24465 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24466 's page break mechanism.
24469 \begin_layout Chapter
24473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24475 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
24482 \begin_layout Standard
24483 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24486 \begin_inset space ~
24492 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24495 \begin_layout Section
24497 \begin_inset Index idx
24502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24518 \begin_layout Standard
24520 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24523 \begin_layout Description
24526 \begin_inset space ~
24529 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24530 \begin_inset Newline newline
24534 \begin_inset Note Note
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24538 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24546 \begin_layout Description
24547 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24548 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24551 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24552 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24554 \begin_inset space ~
24560 \begin_inset Newline newline
24564 \begin_inset Note Comment
24567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24568 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24577 \begin_layout Description
24579 \begin_inset space ~
24582 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24584 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24586 \begin_inset space ~
24592 \begin_inset Newline newline
24596 \begin_inset Newline newline
24600 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24609 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24610 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24615 of a comment that appears in the output.
24621 \begin_inset Newline newline
24625 \begin_inset Newline newline
24628 As you can see in the example,
24629 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24632 \begin_layout Standard
24633 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24645 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24648 \begin_layout Section
24650 \begin_inset Index idx
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24664 name "sec:Footnotes"
24671 \begin_layout Standard
24673 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24674 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24679 or the toolbar button
24682 arg "footnote-insert"
24696 \begin_inset Graphics
24697 filename clipart/footnote.png
24706 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24707 's representation of your footnote.
24717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24741 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24742 Clicking on the box label again will close
24755 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24756 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24771 \begin_layout Standard
24772 Here is an example footnote:
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 To close a footnote,
24782 click on the footnote box label.
24790 \begin_layout Standard
24791 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24792 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24793 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24794 according to the document class.
24796 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24797 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24803 ey are described in the
24806 \begin_inset space ~
24814 \begin_layout Section
24816 \begin_inset Index idx
24821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24830 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24837 \begin_layout Standard
24838 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24840 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24842 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24844 \begin_inset space ~
24849 or the toolbar button
24852 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24879 appearing within your text.
24880 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24881 's representation of your margin
24890 \begin_layout Standard
24891 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24895 \begin_inset Marginal
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 This is a marginal note.
24908 \begin_layout Standard
24909 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24910 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24911 right on odd pages.
24914 \begin_layout Standard
24915 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24918 \begin_inset space ~
24926 \begin_inset space ~
24934 \begin_layout Section
24935 Graphics and Images
24936 \begin_inset Index idx
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24948 \begin_inset Index idx
24953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24962 name "sec:Graphics"
24969 \begin_layout Standard
24970 To insert an image in your document,
24971 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24983 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24986 \begin_layout Standard
24987 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24992 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24993 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24994 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24995 \begin_inset space ~
24999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25001 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
25009 \begin_layout Standard
25014 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
25015 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
25018 \begin_inset space ~
25022 \begin_inset space ~
25031 \begin_inset space ~
25035 \begin_inset space ~
25039 \begin_inset space ~
25044 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
25045 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
25052 \begin_layout Standard
25056 \begin_inset space ~
25060 \begin_inset space ~
25065 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
25066 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
25068 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
25073 \begin_inset space ~
25078 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
25079 only a frame with the image size is printed.
25082 \begin_layout Standard
25083 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
25084 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
25085 This is an example image within a separate,
25086 horizontally centered paragraph:
25089 \begin_layout Standard
25091 \begin_inset Graphics
25092 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
25100 \begin_layout Standard
25101 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
25102 you have to put the image into a float,
25104 \begin_inset space ~
25108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25110 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25118 \begin_layout Subsection
25120 \begin_inset Index idx
25125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25127 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25144 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
25151 \begin_layout Standard
25152 You can insert images in any known file format.
25153 But as we explained in section
25154 \begin_inset space ~
25158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25160 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
25166 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
25168 therefore uses the program
25172 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
25173 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
25174 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
25175 \begin_inset space ~
25179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25181 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
25189 \begin_layout Standard
25190 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
25193 \begin_layout Description
25195 \begin_inset space ~
25198 images consist of pixel values,
25199 often in a compressed form.
25200 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
25201 Well-known bitmap image formats are
25202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25205 Graphics Interchange Format
25206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25223 \begin_inset Index idx
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25249 Portable Network Graphics
25250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25267 \begin_inset Index idx
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25274 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25293 Joint Photographic Experts Group
25294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25323 \begin_inset Index idx
25328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 \begin_layout Description
25349 \begin_inset space ~
25352 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
25353 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
25354 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
25355 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
25356 \begin_inset Newline newline
25359 Scalable image formats can be
25360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25363 Scalable Vector Graphics
25364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25381 \begin_inset Index idx
25386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25407 Encapsulated PostScript
25408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25425 \begin_inset Index idx
25430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25451 Portable Document Format
25452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25469 \begin_inset Index idx
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25490 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25491 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25496 In the case of PDF,
25497 the original image is additionally compressed.
25505 \begin_layout Standard
25506 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25514 \begin_layout Subsection
25515 Grouping of Image Settings
25516 \begin_inset Index idx
25521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25540 \begin_layout Standard
25541 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25542 Images within such a group share their settings,
25543 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25544 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25548 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25551 \begin_inset space ~
25555 \begin_inset space ~
25567 \begin_inset space ~
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25577 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25580 \begin_layout Section
25582 \begin_inset Index idx
25587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25603 \begin_layout Standard
25604 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25607 arg "tabular-insert"
25612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25616 A dialog will appear,
25617 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25618 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25620 and you can select a specific (border) style
25623 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25624 This separation appears due to a double line:
25625 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25626 Here is an example table:
25629 \begin_layout Standard
25631 \begin_inset Tabular
25632 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25633 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25634 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25635 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25636 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25831 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25837 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25838 This corresponds to the
25839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25846 table style listed in the style selection.
25849 \begin_layout Standard
25851 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25852 Other available styles include:
25855 \begin_layout Itemize
25857 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25866 which looks line the above table,
25867 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25870 \begin_layout Itemize
25872 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25873 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25876 \begin_layout Itemize
25878 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25887 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25898 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25899 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25904 \begin_layout Standard
25906 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25907 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25914 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25915 you should alter this setting.
25918 \begin_layout Subsection
25922 \begin_layout Standard
25923 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25925 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25929 This brings up the table dialog.
25930 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25931 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25932 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25933 This means that if you select more cells,
25934 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25937 \begin_layout Standard
25938 In addition to the table dialog,
25942 \begin_inset space ~
25947 helps you in setting table properties.
25948 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25951 \begin_layout Standard
25955 \begin_inset space ~
25960 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25961 If you add a row or column,
25962 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25963 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25964 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25966 \begin_inset space ~
25970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25972 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25980 \begin_layout Standard
25981 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25990 This will merge the cells to
25995 spread over more than one column/row.
25996 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25997 so that the alignment,
25999 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
26000 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
26003 \begin_layout Standard
26005 \begin_inset Tabular
26006 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
26007 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
26008 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26009 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
26010 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
26011 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26022 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26031 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26107 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26142 \begin_layout Standard
26143 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
26144 -arguments for the table.
26145 They are necessary for special table formatting,
26146 such as the multirow cells,
26147 explained in the chapter
26154 \begin_inset space ~
26160 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
26161 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
26162 but are visible in the output.
26165 \begin_layout Standard
26166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26175 Most DVI-viewers are
26179 able to display rotations.
26187 \begin_layout Standard
26192 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
26197 adds lines for all cell borders.
26200 \begin_layout Subsection
26202 \begin_inset Index idx
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26209 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26224 \begin_inset Index idx
26229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26238 \begin_layout Standard
26239 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
26240 you can use the option
26243 \begin_inset space ~
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26255 \begin_inset space ~
26260 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
26261 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
26264 \begin_layout Description
26270 The current row and all rows above,
26271 that don't have any special options defined,
26272 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
26273 Except for the first page,
26277 \begin_inset space ~
26285 \begin_layout Description
26289 \begin_inset space ~
26295 The current row and all rows above,
26296 that don't have any special options defined,
26297 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
26300 \begin_layout Description
26306 The current row and all rows below,
26307 that don't have any special options defined,
26308 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
26309 except for the last page,
26313 \begin_inset space ~
26321 \begin_layout Description
26325 \begin_inset space ~
26331 The current row and all rows below,
26332 that don't have any special options defined,
26333 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
26336 \begin_layout Description
26338 The first row is reset as a single column.
26339 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
26341 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26345 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
26348 \begin_inset space ~
26356 \begin_layout Standard
26357 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
26358 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
26359 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
26360 the others will be defined as
26366 first means first in this order:
26371 \begin_inset space ~
26385 \begin_inset space ~
26391 see the following longtable to see how it works:
26394 \begin_layout Standard
26396 \begin_inset Tabular
26397 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
26398 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
26399 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
26400 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26401 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26402 <row endfirsthead="true">
26403 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26409 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
26414 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26433 <row endfirsthead="true">
26434 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26454 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26466 <row endhead="true">
26467 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26497 <row endhead="true">
26498 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26509 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 <row endfoot="true">
26531 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26582 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27524 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27533 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27553 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27615 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27646 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27677 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27708 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27739 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27770 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27832 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27863 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27956 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28018 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28049 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28080 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28111 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28142 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28422 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28514 <row endlastfoot="true">
28515 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28526 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28535 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28552 \begin_layout Subsection
28554 \begin_inset Index idx
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28561 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28578 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28585 \begin_layout Standard
28586 A table cell can contain text,
28590 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28591 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28592 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28598 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28601 \begin_layout Standard
28602 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28603 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28604 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28610 \begin_inset Tabular
28611 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28612 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28613 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28614 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28635 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28704 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28760 This is longer now.
28765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28816 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28817 This is longer now.
28822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28848 \begin_layout Standard
28849 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28850 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28855 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28860 Selection with the mouse or with
28864 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28865 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28868 \begin_layout Section
28870 \begin_inset Index idx
28875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28891 \begin_layout Subsection
28895 \begin_layout Standard
28896 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28897 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28906 forward or backward a page or two,
28907 to wherever it fits best.
28915 \begin_inset space ~
28921 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28924 \begin_layout Standard
28925 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28926 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28927 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28928 every float can be referenced in the text.
28929 Floats are therefore numbered.
28930 Referencing is described in section
28931 \begin_inset space ~
28935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28937 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28945 \begin_layout Standard
28949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28953 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28954 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28955 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28956 \begin_inset Index idx
28961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28963 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28978 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28979 -document readable,
28980 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28981 A closed float box looks like this:
28983 \begin_inset Graphics
28984 filename clipart/float.png
28989 – a gray button with a red label.
28992 \begin_layout Standard
28993 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28994 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28997 \begin_layout Subsection
28999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29001 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
29006 \begin_inset Index idx
29011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29013 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29030 \begin_layout Standard
29032 \begin_inset space ~
29036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29038 reference "fig:A-star-in"
29043 was created using the menu
29045 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29046 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29052 arg "float-insert figure"
29056 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
29058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29064 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
29068 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
29070 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29072 \begin_inset space ~
29080 arg "layout-paragraph"
29086 \begin_layout Standard
29087 \begin_inset Float figure
29094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29096 \begin_inset Graphics
29097 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29107 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29112 name "fig:A-star-in"
29129 \begin_layout Standard
29130 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
29131 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
29133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29142 ) and refer to it using the menu
29144 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29150 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29154 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
29155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29164 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
29165 will reposition the floats in the final document,
29167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29175 For more about cross-references,
29177 \begin_inset space ~
29181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29183 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29191 \begin_layout Standard
29192 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
29193 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
29194 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
29195 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
29196 \begin_inset space ~
29200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29202 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29209 \begin_inset space ~
29213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29215 reference "fig:Two-images"
29220 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
29221 You can also set the images one below the other.
29223 \begin_inset space ~
29227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29229 reference "fig:Undefinable"
29235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29237 reference "fig:Star"
29242 are the subfigures.
29245 \begin_layout Standard
29246 \begin_inset Float figure
29253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29254 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29258 \begin_inset Float figure
29265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29266 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29271 name "fig:Undefinable"
29283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29284 \begin_inset Graphics
29285 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
29297 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29301 \begin_inset Float figure
29308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29309 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29327 \begin_inset Graphics
29328 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29340 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29347 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29352 name "fig:Two-images"
29369 \begin_layout Subsection
29371 \begin_inset Index idx
29376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29378 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29395 \begin_layout Standard
29396 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
29398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29399 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29402 or the toolbar button
29405 arg "float-insert table"
29409 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
29411 \begin_inset space ~
29415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29417 reference "tab:Table-float"
29425 \begin_layout Standard
29426 \begin_inset Float table
29433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29434 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29439 name "tab:Table-float"
29451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29453 \begin_inset Tabular
29454 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
29455 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29456 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29457 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29458 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29585 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29606 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29609 \end{array}\right]$
29617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29630 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29651 \begin_layout Subsection
29653 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29660 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29679 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29680 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29681 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29682 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29689 \begin_inset space ~
29697 \begin_layout Section
29699 \begin_inset Index idx
29704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29713 \begin_layout Standard
29715 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29718 all the usual rules of indentation,
29721 \begin_inset space \space{}
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29729 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29735 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29738 \begin_layout Standard
29740 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29750 height_special "totalheight"
29755 backgroundcolor "none"
29758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29761 This is a minipage.
29762 The text is set in an italic style.
29765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29768 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29776 \begin_layout Standard
29777 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29780 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29785 as described in section
29786 \begin_inset space ~
29790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29792 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29798 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29804 \begin_layout Standard
29805 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29815 height_special "totalheight"
29820 backgroundcolor "none"
29823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29824 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29825 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29831 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29835 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29845 height_special "totalheight"
29850 backgroundcolor "none"
29853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29854 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29855 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29863 \begin_layout Standard
29864 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29870 \begin_layout Standard
29871 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29872 you can transform the box to another box type.
29873 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29880 \begin_inset space ~
29888 \begin_layout Chapter
29889 Mathematical Formulas
29890 \begin_inset Index idx
29895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29902 \begin_inset Index idx
29907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29909 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29926 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29933 \begin_layout Standard
29934 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29939 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29942 \begin_layout Section
29944 \begin_inset Index idx
29949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29968 \begin_layout Standard
29969 To create a math formula,
29970 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29983 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29984 with purple markers around its corners.
29985 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29986 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29987 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29999 \begin_inset space ~
30005 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
30008 \begin_layout Standard
30009 There are two main types of formulas,
30010 inline formulas and display formulas.
30011 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
30015 \begin_layout Standard
30016 This is a line with an inline formula
30017 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
30023 \begin_layout Standard
30024 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
30026 \begin_inset Formula
30033 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
30036 \begin_layout Standard
30038 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30056 followed by a space,
30057 in a formula will create the Greek letter
30058 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
30062 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
30065 \begin_inset space ~
30073 \begin_layout Subsection
30074 Navigating in Formulas
30075 \begin_inset Index idx
30080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30082 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30099 \begin_layout Standard
30100 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
30102 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
30103 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
30108 will leave a formula construct (a square root
30109 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
30114 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
30119 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
30122 \end{array}\right]$
30130 will leave the formula,
30131 placing the cursor after the formula.
30136 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
30138 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
30141 \begin_layout Standard
30147 printed in this document as
30148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30152 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30160 seems to do nothing in a formula,
30161 since it does not add a space between characters,
30162 but it does exit a nested structure.
30164 you have to be careful about using
30171 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
30180 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30190 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30194 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30200 since in the latter case only the
30203 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
30208 will be under the square root sign:
30210 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30217 You can leave many parts of a formula,
30219 partially filled in,
30221 \begin_inset Formula
30223 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
30232 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
30233 or a subscript with nothing in it,
30234 the results will be unpredictable,
30235 but most constructs don't mind.
30238 \begin_layout Subsection
30242 \begin_layout Standard
30243 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
30244 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
30249 and a cursor movement key to select text.
30250 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
30252 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
30253 That text can then be cut or copied,
30254 and then pasted within any formula,
30255 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
30259 \begin_layout Subsection
30260 Exponents and Subscripts
30261 \begin_inset Index idx
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30268 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30283 \begin_inset Index idx
30288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30290 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30307 \begin_layout Standard
30308 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
30311 arg "math-superscript"
30317 arg "math-subscript"
30321 but it is often much easier to use a command.
30323 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
30330 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30340 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
30347 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
30352 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
30359 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30365 If you use characters in the superscript,
30366 that could be accented with the circumflex
30367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30375 you have to use an extra
30379 to separate the circumflex and the character.
30382 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
30389 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30395 Subscripts are similar:
30397 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
30404 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30412 \begin_layout Subsection
30414 \begin_inset Index idx
30419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30421 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30438 \begin_layout Standard
30439 Create a fraction either with the command
30445 or by using the icon
30448 arg "math-insert \\frac"
30454 \begin_inset space ~
30460 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
30461 The cursor is above the fraction line.
30462 To move it to the bottom,
30474 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
30475 as this example shows:
30476 \begin_inset Formula
30478 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
30481 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30489 \begin_layout Subsection
30491 \begin_inset Index idx
30496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30498 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30516 Roots can be created using the
30519 \begin_inset space ~
30527 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30533 arg "math-insert \\root"
30555 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30563 always produces a square root.
30566 \begin_layout Subsection
30567 Operators with Limits
30568 \begin_inset Index idx
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30575 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30590 \begin_inset Index idx
30595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30597 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30612 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30614 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30621 \begin_layout Standard
30623 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30627 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30630 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30631 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30632 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30633 directly after the symbol.
30634 The sum operator will automatically place its
30635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30642 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30643 and to the side in inline formulas,
30645 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30650 \begin_inset Formula
30652 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30659 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30662 \begin_layout Standard
30663 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30664 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30666 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30667 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30669 \begin_inset space ~
30673 \begin_inset space ~
30687 \begin_layout Standard
30688 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30698 \begin_inset Index idx
30703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30705 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30720 \begin_inset Formula
30722 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30727 which will place the
30728 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30740 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30742 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30748 \begin_layout Standard
30749 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30756 Have a look at section
30757 \begin_inset space ~
30761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30763 reference "subsec:Functions"
30768 for an explanation of function macros.
30771 \begin_layout Subsection
30773 \begin_inset Index idx
30778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30797 \begin_layout Standard
30798 Most math symbols can be found in the
30801 \begin_inset space ~
30806 under one of several categories;
30827 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30830 \begin_layout Standard
30831 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30832 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30833 you don't have to use the
30836 \begin_inset space ~
30842 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30844 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30847 \begin_layout Subsection
30849 \begin_inset Index idx
30854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30856 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30873 \begin_layout Standard
30874 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30880 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30886 \begin_inset space ~
30894 arg "math-insert \\space"
30898 This generates a small space,
30899 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30907 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30910 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30912 \begin_inset Graphics
30913 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30918 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30919 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30920 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30922 because they are negative spaces.
30923 Here are two examples:
30926 \begin_layout Standard
30937 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30943 \begin_layout Standard
30954 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30960 \begin_layout Subsection
30962 \begin_inset Index idx
30967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30969 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30984 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30986 name "subsec:Functions"
30993 \begin_layout Standard
30997 \begin_inset space ~
31002 contains under the button
31005 arg "math-insert \\functions"
31008 a number of function macros,
31010 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
31015 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
31024 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
31031 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
31033 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
31037 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
31043 \begin_layout Standard
31044 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
31046 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
31050 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
31056 \begin_layout Standard
31057 For some mathematical objects,
31059 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
31060 as described in section
31061 \begin_inset space ~
31065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31067 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
31075 \begin_layout Subsection
31077 \begin_inset Index idx
31082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31101 \begin_layout Standard
31102 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
31103 This may depend on your keyboard,
31104 or the bindings file you use.
31105 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31109 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
31112 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
31113 Our example is entered by typing
31118 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
31125 \begin_inset space ~
31129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31131 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
31136 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
31139 \begin_layout Standard
31140 \begin_inset Float table
31147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31148 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31153 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
31157 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
31165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31167 \begin_inset Tabular
31168 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
31169 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
31174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31256 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
31266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
31320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31364 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
31374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31418 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
31428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31472 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
31482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31526 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31580 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31634 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31688 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31733 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31754 \begin_layout Standard
31755 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31758 \begin_inset space ~
31766 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31770 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31773 \begin_layout Section
31774 Brackets and Delimiters
31775 \begin_inset Index idx
31780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31797 \begin_inset Index idx
31802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31804 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31821 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31829 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31832 using just the keys
31837 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31838 like a matrix or a fraction,
31839 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31840 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31843 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31848 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31849 \begin_inset Formula
31851 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31859 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31861 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31864 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31867 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31873 \begin_inset Formula
31875 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31883 \begin_layout Standard
31884 If you use the delimiter icon,
31886 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31889 \begin_layout Standard
31890 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31891 If you use the option
31894 \begin_inset space ~
31900 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31901 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31903 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31909 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31910 with a dotted line,
31911 but nothing will be printed.
31914 \begin_layout Standard
31915 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31916 like a square root,
31917 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31918 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31923 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31926 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31928 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31929 select the structure and enter
31932 arg "math-delim ( )"
31938 \begin_layout Section
31939 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31940 \begin_inset Index idx
31945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31962 \begin_inset Index idx
31967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31969 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31984 \begin_inset Index idx
31989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31991 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31995 Multi-line Equations
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
32013 \begin_inset space ~
32021 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
32025 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
32026 Here is an example:
32027 \begin_inset Formula
32029 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
32038 The parentheses aren't automatic,
32039 but you can add them as described in section
32040 \begin_inset space ~
32044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32046 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
32052 When you construct the matrix,
32053 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
32055 or center-justified.
32056 This alignment is set in the box
32061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32112 for every column as default.
32115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32126 means that the first column will be left-justified,
32127 the second will be centered,
32128 and the third column will be right-justified,
32129 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
32130 The result will look like this:
32131 \begin_inset Formula
32134 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
32135 column & has & has\,right\\
32136 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32146 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
32149 arg "newline-insert newline"
32152 while the cursor is in the matrix.
32153 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
32155 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32158 or the math toolbar.
32161 \begin_layout Standard
32162 There are other arrays used in formulas,
32163 such as distinctions of cases.
32164 It can be created with the menu
32166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32167 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32169 \begin_inset space ~
32181 Here is an example:
32183 \begin_inset Formula
32197 \begin_layout Standard
32198 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32201 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
32204 arg "newline-insert newline"
32208 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
32209 one for each column.
32213 arg "newline-insert newline"
32216 in a non-empty formula,
32217 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
32218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32225 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
32226 the relation sign is in the second column,
32227 and the rest in the third column.
32228 A new row is created by every further entry of
32231 arg "newline-insert newline"
32235 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
32236 Here is an example:
32237 \begin_inset Formula
32239 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
32240 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
32245 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
32246 \begin_inset Formula
32248 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
32256 \begin_layout Standard
32257 The multi-line formula type described here is called
32264 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
32265 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
32266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32268 reference "eq:asquared"
32274 The other types are described in section
32275 \begin_inset space ~
32279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32281 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
32289 \begin_layout Section
32290 Formula Numbering and Referencing
32291 \begin_inset Index idx
32296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32298 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32313 \begin_inset Index idx
32318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32320 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32324 Referencing formulas
32335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32337 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
32344 \begin_layout Standard
32345 To number a formula,
32346 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
32348 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32349 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32351 \begin_inset space ~
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32363 arg "math-number-toggle"
32367 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32368 within parentheses.
32369 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
32370 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
32371 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
32372 separated by a dot:
32373 \begin_inset Formula
32383 arg "math-number-toggle"
32386 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
32387 You can only number displayed formulas.
32390 \begin_layout Standard
32391 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
32394 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32395 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32397 \begin_inset space ~
32401 \begin_inset space ~
32409 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
32412 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
32413 \begin_inset Formula
32416 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
32422 To number all lines use the shortcut
32425 arg "math-number-toggle"
32431 \begin_layout Standard
32432 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32435 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
32436 A label is inserted with the menu
32438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32447 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
32448 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
32449 It is recommended that you use the suggested
32450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32461 as the first part of the label,
32462 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
32463 We inserted in the following example the label
32464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32471 in the second line:
32472 \begin_inset Formula
32474 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
32475 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
32480 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
32481 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
32482 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
32484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32486 \begin_inset space ~
32494 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32498 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32499 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32500 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32503 \begin_layout Standard
32504 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32505 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32507 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32515 \begin_layout Standard
32516 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32517 's cross-reference box are described in section
32518 \begin_inset space ~
32522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32524 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32531 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32538 \begin_layout Section
32539 User defined math macros
32540 \begin_inset Index idx
32545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32547 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32564 \begin_layout Standard
32566 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32567 Math macros are explained in section
32570 \begin_inset space ~
32582 \begin_layout Section
32586 \begin_layout Subsection
32588 \begin_inset Index idx
32593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32612 \begin_layout Standard
32613 The standard font for text is italic,
32614 for numbers the standard is roman.
32615 To set a font in a formula,
32619 \begin_inset space ~
32627 arg "math-insert \\font"
32631 or enter its command,
32633 \begin_inset space ~
32637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32639 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32649 \begin_inset Float table
32656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32657 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32662 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32666 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 \begin_inset Tabular
32677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32678 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32712 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32739 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32799 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32826 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32848 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32854 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32855 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32868 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32884 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32918 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32940 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32946 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32954 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32967 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32983 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 \begin_layout Standard
33018 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33027 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
33030 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
33033 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
33037 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
33057 \begin_layout Standard
33058 When you use a typeface,
33059 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
33060 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
33065 within the box will set the cursor outside,
33066 so that you have to use a
33067 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
33069 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
33072 space when you need a space in the box.
33073 Here is an example where
33074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33085 denotes the set of numbers:
33086 \begin_inset Formula
33088 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
33096 \begin_layout Standard
33097 The typefaces are nestable,
33098 which can cause confusion.
33111 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
33115 \begin_inset Newline newline
33118 So it is better not to use this feature.
33121 \begin_layout Standard
33122 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
33124 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
33128 \begin_inset Newline newline
33131 You can only print them emboldened using the command
33138 which works like the other typeface commands:
33140 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
33146 \begin_layout Standard
33153 works for all symbols,
33158 \begin_layout Standard
33159 A number of other font options are available as well,
33162 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33163 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
33165 \begin_inset space ~
33173 \begin_layout Subsection
33175 \begin_inset Index idx
33180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33200 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
33202 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
33203 which is obtained using the entry
33206 \begin_inset space ~
33210 \begin_inset space ~
33218 \begin_inset space ~
33226 arg "math-insert \\font"
33230 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
33231 in black instead of blue.
33232 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
33233 Here is an example:
33234 \begin_inset Formula
33237 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
33238 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
33247 \begin_layout Subsection
33249 \begin_inset Index idx
33254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33273 \begin_layout Standard
33274 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
33275 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
33296 For most characters,
33305 are actually the same size,
33307 superscripts and subscripts,
33308 and certain other structures,
33314 Except for some operators,
33315 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
33316 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
33317 thinks are appropriate.
33318 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
33321 arg "math-insert \\style"
33325 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
33328 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
33332 which is normally in
33343 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
33347 The four styles are used in the following example:
33350 \begin_layout Standard
33351 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
33356 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
33361 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
33366 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
33372 \begin_layout Standard
33373 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
33375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33377 \begin_inset space ~
33383 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
33385 if the base font size of the document is changed,
33386 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
33387 As an example here is a formula in the font size
33388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33398 \begin_layout Standard
33402 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
33408 \begin_layout Section
33409 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33411 \begin_inset Index idx
33416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_inset Index idx
33428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33430 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33447 \begin_layout Standard
33449 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
33452 \begin_layout Subsection
33453 Enabling AMS-Support
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33457 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
33458 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
33474 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
33475 selecting the checkbox
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33486 \begin_inset space ~
33495 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33499 \begin_inset Index idx
33504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33506 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 \begin_inset space ~
33529 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33530 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33531 -errors in formulas,
33532 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33535 \begin_layout Subsection
33537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33539 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33544 \begin_inset Index idx
33549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33551 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33555 Multi-line Equations
33568 \begin_layout Standard
33569 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33570 provides a selection of different formula types.
33572 allows you to choose between
33597 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33607 for an explanation of these formula types.
33610 \begin_layout Chapter
33614 \begin_layout Section
33616 \begin_inset Index idx
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33630 name "sec:Cross-References"
33637 \begin_layout Standard
33638 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33639 's strengths is cross-references.
33640 You can reference every section,
33644 and list in the document.
33645 To reference a document part,
33646 you have to insert a label into it.
33647 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33648 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33651 \begin_layout Enumerate
33655 \begin_layout Enumerate
33656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33658 name "enu:Second-item"
33665 \begin_layout Enumerate
33669 \begin_layout Standard
33670 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33675 or by pressing the toolbar button
33682 A gray label box like this:
33684 \begin_inset Graphics
33685 filename clipart/label.png
33689 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33691 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33692 in our case the text
33693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33726 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33728 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33729 the suggested prefix will be
33730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33744 \begin_layout Standard
33745 To reference the item,
33746 we refer to its label using the menu
33748 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33751 or the toolbar button
33754 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33758 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33760 \begin_inset Graphics
33761 filename clipart/reference.png
33765 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33766 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33779 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33782 \begin_layout Standard
33783 As an alternative to
33785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33789 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33794 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33796 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33808 \begin_layout Standard
33809 Here is our cross-reference:
33811 \begin_inset space ~
33815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33817 reference "enu:Second-item"
33825 \begin_layout Standard
33826 It is recommended to use a
33827 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33829 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33837 described in section
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33844 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33854 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33857 \begin_layout Standard
33858 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33861 \begin_layout Description
33864 this is the default:
33866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33868 reference "fig:Two-images"
33876 \begin_layout Description
33878 prints the number within two parentheses,
33879 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33880 especially when the reference name
33881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33892 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33900 \begin_layout Description
33902 prints the page number:
33904 \begin_inset space ~
33908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33909 LatexCommand pageref
33910 reference "fig:Two-images"
33918 \begin_layout Description
33920 \begin_inset space ~
33924 \begin_inset space ~
33928 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33931 LatexCommand vpageref
33932 reference "fig:Two-images"
33938 \begin_inset Newline newline
33941 If the label is on the same page,
33942 it prints “on this page”;
33943 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33944 it prints “on the facing page”;
33945 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33946 it prints “on the previous page”;
33947 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33948 it prints “on the next page”.
33949 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33952 \begin_layout Description
33954 \begin_inset space ~
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33967 the text “on page” and the page number:
33969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33971 reference "fig:Two-images"
33977 \begin_inset Newline newline
33980 If the label is on the same page,
33981 this format behaves like
33988 otherwise it behaves like
33992 \begin_inset space ~
33996 \begin_inset space ~
34005 \begin_layout Description
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34011 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
34012 \begin_inset Newline newline
34016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34025 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34035 \begin_inset Index idx
34040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34043 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34058 \begin_inset Index idx
34063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34086 \begin_inset Newline newline
34089 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
34090 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
34092 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
34096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34097 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34105 is the default and preferred because
34109 supports only English documents.
34110 The format is specified by using the command
34114 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
34123 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34124 preamble of the document.
34125 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
34126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34142 \begin_inset Newline newline
34149 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
34154 \begin_inset Newline newline
34165 predefines reference formats for all available types.
34166 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
34167 So if you want to make formatted references to,
34170 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
34176 you might do so as follows:
34177 \begin_inset Newline newline
34184 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
34185 format{prop}{Proposition
34190 \begin_inset Newline newline
34193 For more information about defining formatted references,
34194 have a look at the package documentation
34195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34197 key "prettyref,refstyle"
34203 \begin_inset Newline newline
34214 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
34219 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34221 \begin_inset Newline newline
34224 If you activate the option
34225 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042040
34227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34231 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34234 Format cross-references in work area
34235 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042041
34239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34243 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
34246 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
34249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34257 rather than just displaying the label.
34262 \begin_layout Description
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34268 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
34270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34271 LatexCommand nameref
34272 reference "fig:Two-images"
34280 \begin_layout Description
34282 \begin_inset space ~
34286 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34287 label for the reference:
34289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34290 LatexCommand labelonly
34291 reference "fig:Two-images"
34297 \begin_inset Newline newline
34300 This allows for customization,
34301 using \SpecialChar TeX
34303 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
34310 then you may want to use the
34313 \begin_inset space ~
34319 which will output only the part of the reference following the
34320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34328 This is the form needed for e.
34329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34333 \begin_inset space \space{}
34340 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34342 The varieties are adjusted in the field
34346 of the cross-reference window,
34347 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 You can only use the style
34355 to reference numbered document parts,
34356 while the reference style
34360 is always possible.
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 If you want to reference a section,
34365 put the label in the section heading;
34366 for floats put the label in the caption;
34367 for footnotes put the label in it.
34368 Referencing formulas is explained in section
34369 \begin_inset space ~
34373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34375 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
34383 \begin_layout Standard
34384 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
34388 \begin_inset space ~
34392 \begin_inset space ~
34397 sets the cursor before the referenced label
34398 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632729
34401 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632729
34403 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34404 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label
34405 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632734
34407 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34409 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632735
34413 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
34416 \begin_inset space ~
34421 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
34422 You can also go back with the toolbar button
34425 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
34429 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
34434 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34435 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
34443 \begin_layout Standard
34444 You can change labels at any time.
34445 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
34446 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
34448 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
34449 change them all manually
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
34456 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
34457 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
34460 \begin_layout Standard
34461 References are described in detail in the section
34472 \begin_layout Section
34473 Table of Contents and other Listings
34474 \begin_inset Index idx
34479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34486 \begin_inset Index idx
34491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34493 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34508 \begin_inset Index idx
34513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34529 \begin_layout Subsection
34531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34533 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34544 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34546 \begin_inset space ~
34550 \begin_inset space ~
34556 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34558 If you click on it,
34564 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34565 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34566 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34568 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34570 \begin_inset space ~
34575 that is described in section
34576 \begin_inset space ~
34580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34582 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34590 \begin_layout Standard
34591 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34592 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34593 as described in section
34594 \begin_inset space ~
34598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34600 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34606 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34608 \begin_inset space ~
34612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34614 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34619 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34620 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34623 \begin_layout Subsection
34626 Listings and Algorithms
34627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34629 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34636 \begin_layout Standard
34639 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34640 You can insert them via the
34642 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34643 List/Contents/References
34646 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34649 \begin_layout Section
34650 URLs and Hyperlinks
34651 \begin_inset Index idx
34656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34663 \begin_inset Index idx
34668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34677 \begin_layout Subsection
34679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34689 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34697 \begin_layout Standard
34698 Here is an example URL:
34702 \begin_inset Flex URL
34705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34707 https://www.lyx.org
34715 \begin_layout Standard
34717 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34718 You cannot change the style of the link text
34719 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34723 the URL text will always be in the style
34729 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34730 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34739 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34741 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34747 \begin_layout Standard
34749 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34773 (use whatever the current text font is).
34774 To have italicized URLs,
34778 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34780 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34792 \begin_layout Standard
34794 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34795 To be able to format the URL text,
34796 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34798 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34802 \begin_layout Standard
34804 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34806 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34808 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34810 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34811 between lines at certain characters,
34815 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34817 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34828 \begin_layout Standard
34830 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34831 It does not break at a hyphen (
34836 but you can change that by adding
34841 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34843 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34846 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34847 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34848 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34849 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34853 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34856 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34858 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34860 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34862 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34864 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34865 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34866 a last resort is to put
34869 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34873 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34877 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34886 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34887 in the preamble then the
34888 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34890 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34892 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34894 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34896 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34898 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34900 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34901 be broken at every character.
34903 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34909 \begin_layout Standard
34910 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34919 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34920 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34929 \begin_layout Subsection
34931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34933 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34940 \begin_layout Standard
34941 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34946 or with the toolbar button
34953 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34963 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34964 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34966 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34968 name "LyX's homepage"
34969 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34975 an Email address like this:
34977 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34979 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34980 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34988 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34992 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34993 or any other valid URI (such as
35004 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35012 \begin_layout Standard
35013 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
35014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35026 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
35028 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
35033 \begin_layout Standard
35034 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
35035 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
35036 To set the format of the link text,
35037 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
35038 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
35043 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35045 name "LyX's homepage"
35046 target "https://www.lyx.org"
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35055 The link text color can be changed,
35060 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
35062 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35063 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35067 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
35068 \begin_inset Newline newline
35076 \begin_inset Newline newline
35083 in the PDF Properties dialog.
35084 \change_inserted 5863208 1686630948
35088 \begin_layout Standard
35090 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35091 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
35092 you can use context menu (or
35093 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813434
35095 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35099 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813424
35103 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
35105 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
35109 \begin_layout Section
35111 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
35113 \begin_inset Index idx
35118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35127 name "sec:Counters"
35134 \begin_layout Standard
35136 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35137 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35138 is its ability to manage counters.
35140 this is handled automatically,
35141 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
35142 This can be done in
35143 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
35145 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
35148 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35149 using the counter inset,
35150 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
35151 This allows one to set a counter's value;
35152 to reset it (to zero);
35156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35158 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
35159 Note that the section counter,
35161 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
35163 if you want the next section to be section five,
35165 then you need to set the section counter to four.
35172 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
35173 since the value added can be negative);
35175 to restore the saved value;
35176 and to print the value.
35177 These effects can also be limited to
35178 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
35180 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
35183 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35185 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
35187 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
35189 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
35192 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
35196 \begin_layout Standard
35198 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
35199 There are five commands you can use:
35202 \begin_layout Enumerate
35204 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
35210 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
35213 \begin_layout Enumerate
35215 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
35221 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
35222 if you choose a negative number)
35225 \begin_layout Enumerate
35227 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
35233 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
35236 \begin_layout Enumerate
35238 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
35241 Save value of counter:
35244 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
35247 \begin_layout Enumerate
35249 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
35252 Restore value of counter:
35255 Restores the previously saved value.
35258 \begin_layout Standard
35260 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
35261 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
35266 \begin_layout Section
35268 \begin_inset Index idx
35273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35282 name "sec:Appendices"
35289 \begin_layout Standard
35290 Appendices are created with the menu
35292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35294 \begin_inset space ~
35298 \begin_inset space ~
35304 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
35305 This part is marked with a red borderline.
35308 \begin_layout Standard
35309 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
35310 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
35311 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
35312 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
35316 \begin_layout Standard
35318 \begin_inset space ~
35322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35324 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
35334 \begin_inset space ~
35338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35340 reference "subsec:Export"
35348 \begin_layout Section
35350 \begin_inset Index idx
35355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35364 name "sec:Bibliography"
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35372 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
35374 You can include a bibliography database,
35375 which is explained in sec.
35376 \begin_inset space ~
35380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35382 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35391 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
35392 using the paragraph environment
35397 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
35398 \begin_inset space ~
35402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35404 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
35410 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
35411 such as author-year citations,
35412 and if you have more than a handful of references,
35413 then you should seriously consider
35417 using a bibliography database.
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35421 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
35422 we use two bibliographies in this document,
35427 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
35429 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
35431 the database approach relieves you,
35432 amongst other things,
35433 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
35436 \begin_layout Subsection
35437 The Bibliography Environment
35438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35440 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35453 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
35454 If you click on it,
35455 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
35464 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
35465 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
35466 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
35470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35472 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35475 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
35481 \begin_inset Newline newline
35485 \begin_inset Flex URL
35488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35490 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
35501 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35511 a short form of its title,
35513 \begin_inset Newline newline
35521 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
35526 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35535 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
35537 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35540 or the toolbar button
35543 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
35547 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
35548 Select one or more keys from the list and
35558 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
35559 If you click on the box,
35560 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35563 \begin_layout Standard
35564 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35565 Here are two examples;
35566 the first without a label,
35567 the second with the label
35568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35578 \begin_layout Standard
35582 Companion Second Edition
35586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35588 key "latexcompanion"
35596 \begin_layout Standard
35597 The \SpecialChar LyX
35598 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35600 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35610 \begin_layout Standard
35611 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35612 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35618 \begin_inset Index idx
35623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35626 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35643 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35644 the label needs to be given the form
35645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35656 Author A and Author B(Year)
35657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35664 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35671 \begin_inset space ~
35676 in the document settings
35677 \begin_inset Index idx
35682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35684 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35700 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35710 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35719 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35721 Once you have done that,
35725 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35727 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35730 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35749 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35750 the second the year (without parentheses).
35751 These two are madatory.
35752 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35758 ) and in abrreviated form (
35766 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35767 add the abbreviated form to
35771 and the full list to the optional
35779 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35780 If specified like this,
35783 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35784 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35787 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35804 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35808 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35809 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35810 In the bibliography entry,
35811 author and year must be added manually.
35816 \begin_layout Standard
35817 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35819 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35821 \begin_inset space ~
35829 arg "layout-paragraph"
35833 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35836 \begin_layout Subsection
35837 Bibliography databases
35838 \begin_inset Index idx
35843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35845 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35862 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35869 \begin_layout Standard
35870 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35875 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35876 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35881 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35882 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35883 This database can be used for different documents,
35884 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35885 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35889 The database is a text file with the file extension
35890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35902 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35903 The format is explained in
35904 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35911 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35915 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35921 The file can be created using any text editor,
35922 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35923 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35925 \begin_inset Flex URL
35928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35930 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35940 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35941 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35942 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35943 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35944 But it has its drawbacks,
35945 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35946 Those are addressed by
35951 \begin_inset Index idx
35956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35959 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35974 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35975 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35986 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35988 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35989 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35999 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
36002 \begin_layout Standard
36003 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36009 set in the document settings (menu
36011 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36015 \begin_inset Index idx
36020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36022 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36043 \begin_inset space ~
36048 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36056 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36057 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36059 \begin_inset Index idx
36064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36070 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36084 \begin_layout Standard
36085 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36090 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36098 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36106 Add bibliography to TOC
36108 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
36113 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
36115 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
36120 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
36121 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36127 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36128 style file is a text file with the file extension
36129 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36140 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
36141 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36142 distribution should provide several of these,
36143 and many publishers provide their own style files,
36144 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
36145 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
36146 but this is something for experts.
36150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36151 For information on how this is done,
36153 \begin_inset Newline newline
36157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36159 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
36169 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36175 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
36178 \begin_layout Standard
36179 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
36182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36184 \begin_inset Index idx
36189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36191 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36206 \begin_inset Index idx
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36231 \begin_layout Standard
36232 Accessing a database via
36236 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36239 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
36241 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
36246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36247 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
36249 \begin_inset space ~
36255 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36256 you cannot select a
36261 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
36265 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36268 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
36270 note the following.
36275 \begin_layout Standard
36280 has two different style files:
36281 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
36282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36293 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
36294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36305 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
36306 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
36307 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
36310 \begin_layout Standard
36315 styles are not set in the
36318 \begin_inset space ~
36324 but in the document settings.
36325 \begin_inset Index idx
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36332 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36347 in the dialog in the
36352 which is only visible if you use
36357 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
36358 These options are described in detail in the
36364 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36374 \begin_layout Standard
36375 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
36376 \begin_inset space ~
36380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36382 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36394 Bibliography Processors
36397 \begin_layout Standard
36398 To generate the bibliography from a database,
36400 uses a bibliography processor,
36401 that is an external program that reads the database,
36402 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
36403 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36405 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
36406 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
36410 \begin_layout Standard
36412 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
36413 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
36414 You can do this on a general level in
36416 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36417 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36418 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36421 or for individual documents in
36423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36424 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36428 The following variants are available by default:
36431 \begin_layout Description
36434 \begin_inset Index idx
36439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36456 developed exclusively for
36460 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36466 provides full Unicode support,
36467 unlimited memory and many specific features
36477 it is strongly recommended to use
36484 \begin_layout Description
36485 bibtex the standard;
36486 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
36488 works with all bibliography packages,
36489 although it will probably fail with
36493 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
36496 \begin_layout Description
36497 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
36503 works with all bibliography packages,
36504 although more complex
36508 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
36513 features are supported.
36516 \begin_layout Standard
36517 By default (with the
36523 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36524 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36537 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36538 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36539 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36544 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
36557 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36558 -based bibliography styles).
36559 This should suit most needs.
36562 \begin_layout Standard
36563 In Japanese documents,
36564 a specific processor is used.
36565 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36566 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36572 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36573 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36574 You can adjust it in
36576 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36577 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36578 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36584 \begin_layout Standard
36585 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36586 Before adding options,
36587 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36594 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36604 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36608 \begin_layout Standard
36610 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36611 These are explained in detail in section
36613 Customizing Bibliographies
36617 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36622 Additional Features
36625 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36629 \begin_layout Subsection
36631 \begin_inset Index idx
36636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36655 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36662 \begin_layout Standard
36663 Many different citation formats are common,
36665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36669 \begin_inset space \space{}
36672 numerical citation (as
36673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36680 like in this document),
36681 alpha-numerical citations (as
36682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36689 ) or author-year citations (as
36690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36699 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36702 \begin_layout Standard
36703 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36706 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36707 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36711 \begin_inset Index idx
36716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36732 you have a range of other options,
36733 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36738 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36742 \begin_inset space ~
36753 \begin_inset space ~
36758 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36761 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36769 \begin_layout Standard
36770 With a bibliography database (see
36771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36773 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36781 ) one has in contrary to the
36785 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36786 These style formats are available:
36789 \begin_layout Description
36791 \begin_inset space ~
36794 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36795 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36798 \begin_layout Description
36799 Biblatex loads the package
36804 \begin_inset Index idx
36809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36812 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36826 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36828 Biblatex citation style
36832 Biblatex bibliography style
36835 Options to the package
36839 can be entered in the
36846 \begin_layout Description
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36855 mode) loads the package
36859 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36860 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36871 behavior very closely.
36876 this option has some additional styles.
36881 styles are also supported by this variant.
36884 \begin_layout Description
36886 \begin_inset space ~
36889 (BibTeX) loads the package
36894 \begin_inset Index idx
36899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36916 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36919 \begin_layout Description
36921 \begin_inset space ~
36924 (BibTeX) loads the package
36929 \begin_inset Index idx
36934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36951 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36954 \begin_layout Standard
36963 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36964 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36974 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36976 Whether the output uses numerical,
36977 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36979 Biblatex citation style
36983 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36984 a suitable style is proposed.
36991 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36994 \begin_layout Standard
36995 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36996 multiple style variants are available in the
37001 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
37002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37017 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
37018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37022 \begin_inset space \space{}
37026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37037 \begin_layout Standard
37038 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
37040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37044 \begin_inset space \space{}
37048 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
37049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37053 \begin_inset space \space{}
37057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37069 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
37073 \begin_inset space ~
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37087 Here is a simple example where the text
37088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37092 \begin_inset space ~
37096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37099 appears after the reference:
37102 \begin_layout Quote
37104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37107 key "latexcompanion"
37115 \begin_layout Standard
37116 All styles except for
37120 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
37121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37129 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
37130 if the style requires this.
37133 \begin_layout Standard
37134 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
37135 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
37136 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
37137 the postnote will follow the last.
37142 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
37143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37146 qualified citation lists
37147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37153 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
37157 dialog will display three columns in the field
37165 \begin_inset space ~
37174 \begin_inset space ~
37182 \begin_inset space ~
37188 If you double-click on an item's
37191 \begin_inset space ~
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37205 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
37208 General text before
37214 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
37217 \begin_layout Subsection
37219 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
37220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37222 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
37226 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37232 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
37234 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
37237 \begin_inset space ~
37241 \begin_inset space ~
37245 \begin_inset space ~
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37252 Content\SpecialChar ldots
37255 context menu if specific conditions are met:
37258 \begin_layout Itemize
37260 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
37261 If citation entries include any of the fields
37262 \begin_inset Flex Code
37265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37267 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37276 \begin_inset Flex Code
37279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37281 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37289 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
37291 \begin_inset Flex Code
37294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37296 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37304 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
37309 \begin_inset Flex Code
37312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37314 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37323 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
37326 \begin_layout Itemize
37328 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37329 If citation entries include any of the fields
37330 \begin_inset Flex Code
37333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37335 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37344 \change_inserted 5863208 1692129620
37346 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37348 \begin_inset Flex Code
37351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37353 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37361 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
37362 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
37363 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
37366 \begin_layout Standard
37368 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37369 In addition to that,
37372 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
37377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37379 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37380 By default we provide python script
37381 \begin_inset Flex Code
37384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37386 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
37395 but you can use any modified script by setting
37396 \begin_inset Flex Code
37399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37401 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
37404 citation_search_view
37412 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
37414 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
37416 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37418 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
37423 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
37425 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37429 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37432 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
37433 The default setting is to be found in the file
37437 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
37445 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37446 your disk for matching files if you enable
37448 Search drive for cited files
37452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37453 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
37454 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37459 It uses the tokens supplied at
37463 in the same preferences section (by default:
37465 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
37470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37472 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37474 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
37476 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
37478 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37480 \begin_inset Flex Code
37483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37485 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
37486 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
37495 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
37497 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
37499 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37518 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
37521 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37522 are automatically stripped from the result.
37523 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
37525 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37534 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37536 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
37537 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
37539 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
37541 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37542 of the file (at arbitrary position).
37544 opens the first matching file it finds.
37545 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
37546 the more systematic your file naming is,
37547 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
37548 the greater the chance this works for you.
37553 \begin_layout Standard
37555 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402434
37556 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
37557 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37559 \begin_inset Flex Code
37562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37564 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37573 \begin_inset Flex Code
37576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37578 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37587 but there are also special keys,
37588 which are documented in the
37590 Customization manual
37596 Cite format description
37601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37603 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402437
37604 Security implications
37607 \begin_layout Standard
37609 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402479
37610 Note that any document (or mainly
37611 \begin_inset Flex Code
37614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37616 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402454
37624 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
37627 \begin_layout Standard
37629 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402467
37630 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
37631 but beware what you are doing).
37636 \begin_layout Section
37638 \begin_inset Index idx
37643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37659 \begin_layout Standard
37660 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37669 or the toolbar button
37676 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37684 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37689 for some advanced methods)
37693 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37697 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37699 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37703 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37708 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37710 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37712 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37715 the text that appears in the index
37716 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37717 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37727 index inset in the heading above for example)
37730 The word where the cursor is in
37731 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37735 or the currently highlighted text
37736 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37740 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37742 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37746 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37752 copied into the inset)
37757 \begin_layout Standard
37759 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37760 (which prints out the index in your document)
37763 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37764 in the document with
37765 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37771 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37773 \begin_inset space ~
37779 A light blue box labeled
37780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37791 will show the place where the index
37792 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37794 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37798 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37803 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37806 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37808 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37811 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37813 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37815 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37817 as there are no settings to make.
37818 This changes if you select
37819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37822 Use multiple indexes
37823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37827 \begin_inset space ~
37831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37833 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37843 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37844 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37850 \begin_layout Standard
37852 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37854 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37856 you can customize index entries to look different.
37857 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37858 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37859 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37860 or additionally to,
37862 you can format the page reference (e.
37863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37867 make it bold for specific pages),
37868 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37869 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37883 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37890 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37891 give a short overview of
37892 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37896 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37897 these features in turn
37898 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37901 in the next subsections.
37902 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37903 's index mechanism,
37904 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37906 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37908 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37916 \begin_layout Subsection
37918 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37921 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37927 Grouping Index Entries
37928 \begin_inset Index idx
37933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37935 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37953 Index entries are often
37954 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37957 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37958 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37959 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37965 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37972 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37982 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37983 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37987 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37997 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37998 Maximally two such subentry insets,
38000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38004 three levels of grouping in total,
38005 are allowed per index entry.
38006 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
38007 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
38008 In the \SpecialChar LyX
38010 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
38015 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38024 \begin_layout Standard
38026 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
38028 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
38029 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
38030 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38031 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
38032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38040 First we create the entry
38041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38049 \begin_inset space ~
38053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38055 reference "subsec:Lists"
38061 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
38062 \begin_inset space ~
38066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38068 reference "sec:Itemize"
38074 we insert the command
38077 \begin_layout Standard
38079 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38087 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38091 \begin_layout Standard
38093 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38101 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
38102 for the enumerated list in section
38103 \begin_inset space ~
38107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38109 reference "sec:Enumerate"
38119 \begin_layout Standard
38121 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
38122 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38124 subentries are indicated by a preceding
38125 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
38129 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
38133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38141 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
38143 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38145 although you have to take care that the character is not
38148 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
38151 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38153 \begin_inset space ~
38157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38159 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38165 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
38166 marks the grouping levels.
38170 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
38171 You can have three levels;
38172 every index level is indented a bit more.
38173 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
38174 If we don't have an index entry for
38175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38183 it will be printed anyway,
38184 but without a page number.
38189 \begin_layout Subsection
38191 \begin_inset Index idx
38196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38198 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38217 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
38219 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
38223 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
38224 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
38225 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
38226 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
38230 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
38232 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
38236 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
38237 index more pages under the same entry
38238 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
38239 refer to a page range instead,
38240 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
38241 one that marks the beginning of the range,
38242 the other that marks its end
38246 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
38247 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
38248 To mark start and end,
38249 select the respective
38253 option in the index inset settings dialog.
38254 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
38255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38275 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
38276 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
38277 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
38278 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38283 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38285 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
38286 we create an index entry in section
38287 \begin_inset space ~
38291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38293 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
38301 \begin_layout Standard
38303 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38306 Paragraph environments|(
38309 \begin_layout Standard
38311 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38312 and another entry at the end of section
38313 \begin_inset space ~
38317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38319 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
38327 \begin_layout Standard
38329 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38332 Paragraph environments|)
38335 \begin_layout Standard
38337 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38362 respectively start and end the index range.
38363 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
38364 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
38365 An example is the index entry
38366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38379 \begin_layout Subsection
38381 \begin_inset Index idx
38386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38405 \begin_layout Standard
38406 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
38407 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
38414 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
38415 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
38417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38429 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
38430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38442 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
38443 \begin_inset space ~
38447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38449 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
38456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38471 \begin_layout Standard
38473 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
38474 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
38477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38484 \begin_layout Standard
38486 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
38487 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
38490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38491 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38503 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
38504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38524 \begin_layout Standard
38526 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38527 We referred for example in the index entry
38528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38536 \begin_inset space ~
38540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38542 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
38547 ) to the index entry
38548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38555 in the same section using the entry
38558 \begin_layout Standard
38560 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38563 GIF|see{Image formats}
38566 \begin_layout Standard
38568 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38569 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
38571 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
38572 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
38577 \begin_layout Subsection
38579 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
38580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38582 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38589 \begin_inset Index idx
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38596 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38613 \begin_layout Standard
38615 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38616 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38617 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38622 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38625 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38626 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38627 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38628 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38629 or if you use macros
38632 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38636 \begin_layout Standard
38638 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38639 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38645 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38647 \begin_inset space ~
38651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38653 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38663 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38664 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38691 \begin_inset Index idx
38696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38698 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38713 \begin_inset Index idx
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38735 \begin_inset Index idx
38740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38747 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38749 maison but we want the order maïs,
38756 \begin_layout Standard
38758 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38761 previous entry@current entry
38764 \begin_layout Standard
38766 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38767 In our case we want to have
38768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38783 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38786 \begin_layout Standard
38788 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38794 \begin_layout Standard
38796 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38797 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38798 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38800 See the next subsection for an example.
38801 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38805 \begin_layout Standard
38807 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38808 To accommodate for that,
38811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38812 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38816 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38817 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38819 you can pass the sort key
38820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38831 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38834 \begin_layout Standard
38836 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38837 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38839 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38848 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38850 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38852 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38860 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38870 \begin_layout Subsection
38872 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38874 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38878 \begin_inset Index idx
38883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38885 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 \begin_layout Standard
38904 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38906 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38909 he appearance of index entries
38910 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38911 can be formatted as usual
38913 via the text style dialog
38914 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38916 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38917 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38920 \begin_inset Index idx
38925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38933 This is an italic dummy entry
38944 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38945 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38960 will be listed separately.
38962 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38964 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38968 \begin_layout Standard
38970 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38974 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38976 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38980 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38986 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38988 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38989 number using the character
38990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38997 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38998 -command without a backslash.
38999 We can write for example
39000 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
39001 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
39021 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
39028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39032 a self-defined command
39033 \begin_inset Flex Code
39036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39038 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
39046 or an existing macro such as
39047 \begin_inset Flex Code
39050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39052 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
39065 \begin_layout Standard
39067 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
39070 italic page number:|textit
39073 \begin_layout Standard
39075 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
39076 to get the page number in italic.
39077 \begin_inset Index idx
39082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 italic page number:|textit
39089 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
39090 -commands begin with a backslash,
39091 but in this special case
39092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39108 \begin_inset space ~
39114 Have a look at section
39115 \begin_inset space ~
39119 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39121 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
39126 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39132 \begin_layout Standard
39134 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
39135 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39144 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
39148 to generate the index,
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39156 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39167 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
39172 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
39174 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39177 key "latexcompanion"
39192 \begin_layout Standard
39194 we encourage you to
39195 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
39196 not format page numbers directly as shown above
39197 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
39198 use self-defined commands
39202 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
39203 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
39204 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
39206 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
39208 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
39209 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
39210 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
39213 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
39217 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
39218 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
39219 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
39220 definition of the indexed term,
39221 so that users can easily find definitions.
39223 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
39227 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
39230 the following in the preamble
39233 \begin_layout Standard
39239 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
39241 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
39247 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
39255 \begin_layout Standard
39257 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
39259 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
39260 add the custom formatting
39261 \begin_inset Flex Code
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
39274 to the respective entry settings dialog.
39279 \begin_layout Standard
39281 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
39287 \begin_layout Standard
39289 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
39290 in the index entry.
39291 \begin_inset Index idx
39296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39303 The advantage is that,
39305 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
39306 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
39309 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
39310 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
39311 not every single index entry.
39312 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
39316 \begin_layout Standard
39318 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
39319 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
39330 If you use the index processor
39336 makeindex or xindex
39339 \begin_inset space ~
39343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39345 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39351 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
39356 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
39357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39364 (style file) you use before they can be used.
39366 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
39369 \begin_layout Verbatim
39371 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
39373 (markup-locref :open "
39375 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
39378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39380 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
39382 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39385 key "latexcompanion"
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 You can also change the layout
39402 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
39404 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
39410 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
39412 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
39416 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
39420 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
39424 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
39427 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
39430 get a bold font for all index entries.
39432 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
39435 it is better (and required for
39436 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
39439 more advanced tasks
39440 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
39444 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
39447 to set up a so-called
39450 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
39474 ) to determine the formatting;
39475 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
39480 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
39482 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
39488 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
39495 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
39503 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
39511 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
39516 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
39518 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39520 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
39526 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
39528 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39530 key "makeindex,xindy"
39539 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
39540 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39541 packages available that ease such formatting,
39543 \begin_inset Flex URL
39546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39548 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
39550 https://ctan.org/topic/index
39560 \begin_layout Subsection
39562 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
39563 Special Characters in Index Entries
39564 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39566 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
39573 \begin_layout Standard
39575 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
39576 As already mentioned above,
39577 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
39580 \begin_inset Flex Code
39583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39585 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
39595 \begin_inset Flex Code
39598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39600 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39610 \begin_inset Flex Code
39613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39615 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39616 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39628 \begin_inset Flex Code
39631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39633 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39642 If you use them literally,
39643 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39645 you will not get the character itself.
39648 \begin_layout Standard
39650 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39651 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39653 \begin_inset Quotes els
39657 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39661 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39663 the escape character is
39664 \begin_inset Flex Code
39667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39669 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39670 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39680 (but this can be changed).
39682 \begin_inset Flex Code
39685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39687 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39688 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39700 \begin_inset Flex Code
39703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39705 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39706 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39718 \begin_inset Flex Code
39721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39723 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39724 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39728 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39740 \begin_inset Flex Code
39743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39745 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39746 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39756 to get the special character you want.
39757 Note that the escape character,
39759 \begin_inset Flex Code
39762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39765 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39780 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39781 \begin_inset space ~
39785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39787 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39797 \begin_layout Subsection
39799 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39802 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39806 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39809 \begin_layout Standard
39811 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39812 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39813 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39814 This is not only time-consuming,
39815 but also error-prone;
39817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39821 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39823 provides some functions to ease the task.
39826 \begin_layout Standard
39828 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39830 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39831 you can open the outliner via
39833 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39843 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39853 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39854 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39859 it will be more easier),
39864 -click on the entry and select
39866 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39868 from the context menu.
39869 This will do just what it says:
39870 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39873 \begin_layout Standard
39875 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39878 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39879 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39880 you can select from the context menu
39882 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39885 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39886 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39887 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39888 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39892 is the word before the index entry,
39897 will be considered as well,
39903 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39905 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39906 but only relevant occurrences!
39907 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39908 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39910 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39913 \begin_layout Subsection
39915 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39917 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39921 \begin_inset Index idx
39926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39928 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39945 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39952 \begin_layout Standard
39954 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39956 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39963 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39972 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39980 for index generation;
39981 otherwise the program
39986 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39989 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39996 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
40002 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
40003 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
40004 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
40005 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
40007 if you are writing in another than the English language,
40022 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
40023 As a further option,
40024 you can select the rather new
40031 \begin_layout Itemize
40033 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
40039 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
40040 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
40041 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40049 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
40055 how to manually fix this sorting,
40056 but this is very tedious work).
40059 \begin_layout Itemize
40061 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
40062 The alternative program,
40068 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
40069 It can sort most languages correctly,
40070 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
40076 is no longer actively maintained,
40077 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
40083 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
40084 But if you have it available,
40085 it is almost always a better option than
40092 \begin_layout Itemize
40094 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
40101 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
40102 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
40103 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
40104 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
40106 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
40107 The program is still in development,
40108 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
40109 But the program is definitely worth a try,
40114 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
40119 \begin_layout Standard
40121 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
40123 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
40127 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
40129 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
40132 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
40133 's preferences dialog,
40135 \begin_inset space ~
40139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40141 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
40147 The available options are listed and explained in
40148 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
40150 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40152 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
40158 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
40160 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40162 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
40172 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
40174 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
40178 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
40180 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
40183 alternative program
40184 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
40187 to generate the index.
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40191 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
40192 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
40195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40200 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
40203 \begin_layout Subsection
40205 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
40206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40208 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
40217 \begin_layout Standard
40218 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
40220 you might need to set up a separate
40221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40228 next to the standard index.
40230 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
40231 but there are packages that add this feature.
40238 \begin_inset Index idx
40243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40260 package to generate multiple indexes.
40261 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
40266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40267 If yours does not ship it,
40268 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
40271 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40279 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40281 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
40282 Please consult the package's manual for details.
40290 \begin_layout Standard
40291 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
40292 for the use of multiple indexes,
40295 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40296 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 and select the option
40301 Use multiple Indexes
40308 already contains the standard index
40309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40317 To add further indexes,
40318 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
40322 input field and press the
40327 The new index now also appears in the list.
40329 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
40330 label color to the new index.
40333 \begin_layout Standard
40334 Once the document changes have been applied,
40335 you can find the new index list in
40337 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40338 List/Contents/References
40344 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
40345 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
40346 but there are additional features:
40349 \begin_layout Itemize
40350 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
40351 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
40354 \begin_layout Itemize
40355 By right-clicking on an index,
40356 you can change its type.
40358 you can specify an index to be a
40364 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
40366 if you use a book class,
40367 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
40368 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
40371 \begin_layout Itemize
40376 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
40377 code in the name of the index.
40380 \begin_layout Section
40381 Nomenclature/Glossary
40382 \begin_inset Index idx
40387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40394 \begin_inset Index idx
40399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40401 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
40404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40418 name "sec:Nomenclature"
40425 \begin_layout Standard
40426 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
40429 \begin_layout Standard
40430 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
40431 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40437 \begin_inset Index idx
40442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40445 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40460 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40463 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40470 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40474 \begin_layout Standard
40475 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
40477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40488 or the toolbar button
40491 arg "nomencl-insert"
40496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40507 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
40510 \begin_layout Standard
40511 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
40512 The first is the term or
40516 that you wish to define.
40521 of the term or symbol.
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40534 To use \SpecialChar TeX
40535 code for nomenclature entries the option
40539 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
40547 \begin_layout Subsection
40548 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
40549 \begin_inset Index idx
40554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40573 \begin_layout Standard
40574 If you have symbols in formulas,
40575 you have to define them in the
40579 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40586 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40595 \begin_inset Newline newline
40603 \begin_inset Newline newline
40609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40616 character starts/ends the formula.
40617 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40618 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40629 For capital Greek letters,
40630 start the command also with a capital letter,
40640 \begin_layout Standard
40641 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40642 syntax is given in section
40643 \begin_inset space ~
40647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40649 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40657 \begin_layout Standard
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40666 dialog to format the description text;
40667 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40669 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40674 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40681 in this document is:
40682 \begin_inset Newline newline
40687 dummy entry for the character
40692 \begin_inset Newline newline
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40714 font use the command
40745 \begin_layout Standard
40746 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40751 \begin_inset space \space{}
40755 \begin_inset Newline newline
40771 \begin_inset Newline newline
40774 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40775 This command will make the font of all symbols
40782 \begin_inset space ~
40790 \begin_layout Standard
40791 If the characters |
40792 \begin_inset space \space{}
40796 \begin_inset space \space{}
40800 \begin_inset space \space{}
40805 \begin_inset space \space{}
40809 \begin_inset space \space{}
40812 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40813 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40814 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40816 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40819 character in front of them.
40820 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40822 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40823 LatexCommand nomenclature
40824 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40825 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40831 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40833 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40834 LatexCommand nomenclature
40835 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40836 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40846 \begin_layout Subsection
40847 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40848 \begin_inset Index idx
40853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40855 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40872 \begin_layout Standard
40873 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40874 -code of the symbol definition.
40875 This leads to undesired results when you,
40877 have symbols in formulas.
40878 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40881 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40882 LatexCommand nomenclature
40884 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40892 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40896 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40897 LatexCommand nomenclature
40900 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40906 They will be sorted by
40907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40933 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40936 will be sorted before the
40940 since the character
40941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40948 is considered in sorting.
40951 \begin_layout Standard
40952 To control the sort order,
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40961 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40962 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40963 For the example given,
40968 in this field for the
40969 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40977 will be located before
40978 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40984 \begin_layout Standard
40985 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40991 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41001 \begin_layout Subsection
41002 Nomenclature Options
41003 \begin_inset Index idx
41008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41010 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41027 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
41034 \begin_layout Standard
41039 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
41040 Here are some of its options;
41041 for more have a look at its documentation:
41044 \begin_layout Description
41045 refeq Appends the phrase
41046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41062 to every nomenclature entry,
41069 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
41072 \begin_layout Description
41073 refpage Appends the phrase
41074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41090 to every nomenclature entry,
41097 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
41100 \begin_layout Description
41101 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
41104 \begin_layout Standard
41105 To use one or more of the options,
41106 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
41108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41112 In this document the options
41120 \begin_layout Standard
41121 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41127 \begin_layout Standard
41128 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
41132 field in the nomenclature dialog:
41135 \begin_layout Description
41145 \begin_layout Description
41148 nomrefpage Like the
41155 \begin_layout Description
41158 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
41167 \begin_layout Description
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41177 \begin_inset space ~
41182 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
41185 \begin_layout Standard
41187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41194 are automatically translated for most document languages.
41196 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
41200 \begin_layout Standard
41209 \begin_inset Newline newline
41215 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41235 \begin_inset Newline newline
41242 pagedeclaration}[1]{
41243 \begin_inset Newline newline
41249 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 \begin_inset space ~
41271 \begin_layout Standard
41272 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
41273 assure that you use
41276 \begin_inset space ~
41281 in the document settings under
41284 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_layout Standard
41300 \begin_inset Newline newline
41304 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41308 \begin_inset space ~
41321 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
41323 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
41324 \begin_inset Newline newline
41331 pagedeclaration}[1]{
41332 \begin_inset Newline newline
41336 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41340 \begin_inset space ~
41353 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
41358 \begin_layout Subsection
41359 Printing the Nomenclature
41360 \begin_inset Index idx
41365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41367 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41384 \begin_layout Standard
41385 To print the nomenclature,
41388 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41389 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
41394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41405 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
41406 By right-clicking on it,
41407 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
41408 You can choose between these settings:
41411 \begin_layout Description
41412 Default a space of 1
41413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41419 \begin_layout Description
41421 \begin_inset space ~
41425 \begin_inset space ~
41428 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
41431 \begin_layout Description
41432 Custom custom space
41435 \begin_layout Standard
41436 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
41437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41445 If you are not happy with the name,
41446 you can change it by redefining the command
41454 in order to change the name to
41459 add the following line to the preamble:
41462 \begin_layout Standard
41475 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
41478 \begin_layout Standard
41479 When you are using another document language than English,
41481 \begin_inset Newline newline
41497 where *** is the name of the language used.
41500 \begin_layout Subsection
41501 Nomenclature Program
41502 \begin_inset Index idx
41507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41526 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
41533 \begin_layout Standard
41540 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
41542 to generate the nomenclature.
41544 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
41550 \begin_inset space ~
41554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41556 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
41562 The available options are listed and explained in
41563 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41565 key "nomencl,makeindex"
41573 \begin_layout Section
41575 \begin_inset Index idx
41580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41587 \begin_inset Index idx
41592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41611 name "sec:Branches"
41618 \begin_layout Standard
41619 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41620 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41621 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41624 \begin_layout Standard
41625 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41626 allows you to put text into branches.
41627 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41628 To create a branch,
41629 either select the menu
41631 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41632 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41635 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41637 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41645 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41646 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41647 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41648 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41650 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41663 \begin_inset space ~
41666 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41667 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41670 \begin_layout Standard
41671 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41672 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41677 where you can choose a branch.
41678 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41681 \begin_layout Standard
41682 Here is an example,
41683 where only the question text appears,
41684 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41687 \begin_layout Standard
41688 \begin_inset Branch Question
41692 \begin_layout Standard
41698 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41706 \begin_layout Standard
41707 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41711 \begin_layout Standard
41717 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41725 \begin_layout Standard
41732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41737 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41738 Consider for example a file
41739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41746 which has the above branches.
41748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41756 the PDF export file would be called
41757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41780 branch were inactive,
41782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41819 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41823 if both branches were active.
41824 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41825 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41831 \begin_layout Standard
41833 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41834 It is also possible to
41835 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41839 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41841 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41845 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41850 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41851 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41855 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41857 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41860 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41861 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41862 right-click on the inset button and choose
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41873 \begin_layout Standard
41874 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41878 \begin_layout Standard
41885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41892 branch is deactivated.
41898 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41904 \begin_layout Standard
41905 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41906 like inside equations,
41907 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41908 definitions for each branch.
41909 For example you can define for the question branch
41913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41914 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41917 \begin_inset space ~
41921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41923 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41936 \begin_layout Standard
41946 \begin_layout Standard
41956 \begin_layout Standard
41957 and for the answer branch
41960 \begin_layout Standard
41970 \begin_layout Standard
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41981 \begin_inset Branch Question
41985 \begin_layout Standard
41989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42017 \begin_layout Standard
42018 \begin_inset Branch Answer
42022 \begin_layout Standard
42026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42054 \begin_layout Standard
42055 Now it is possible to use the
42059 question{\SpecialChar ldots
42066 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
42069 commands to obtain conditional output.
42070 Here is an example formula where only the
42077 \begin_inset Formula
42079 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
42087 \begin_layout Standard
42089 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
42097 \begin_layout Standard
42098 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
42099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42103 \begin_inset space \space{}
42106 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
42108 For this advanced usage,
42116 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42119 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
42123 \begin_layout Standard
42125 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42127 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813809
42129 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813809
42131 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42133 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813823
42135 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813823
42137 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42139 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813812
42141 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42143 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813845
42144 to keep all branches of a given name in
42145 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42147 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813847
42149 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42151 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813855
42153 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813873
42154 activation branch status with
42155 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42157 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813886
42160 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813893
42161 of all branch insets in the document we provide
42162 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813893
42165 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42169 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813903
42174 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813949
42175 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
42176 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813904
42179 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42181 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813911
42183 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813959
42185 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42187 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813962
42189 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42190 keyboard shortcut or add
42191 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813966
42193 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813966
42195 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42197 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813971
42199 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42200 user-defined context menu
42201 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813975
42203 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813976
42205 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42207 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813978
42209 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
42215 \begin_layout Section
42217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42219 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
42224 \begin_inset Index idx
42229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42238 \begin_layout Standard
42240 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
42245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42246 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42250 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
42253 allows you to set up
42254 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
42256 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
42260 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
42262 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
42266 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
42270 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
42275 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
42277 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
42281 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
42283 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
42286 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42288 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
42290 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
42298 \begin_inset Index idx
42303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42306 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42321 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
42322 which you need to enable by clicking
42324 Use Hyperref Support
42326 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
42327 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
42329 Customize Hyperref Options
42332 Among other things,
42334 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
42338 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
42340 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
42344 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
42348 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
42351 cross-references in the
42352 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
42356 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
42358 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
42362 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
42363 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
42367 table of contents entry or on a reference to
42368 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
42369 open a website or to
42371 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
42373 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
42375 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
42376 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
42381 \begin_layout Standard
42382 The header information in the dialog tab
42386 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
42387 Many programs are able to extract this information,
42390 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
42393 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
42394 This is very useful to sort,
42395 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
42399 \begin_inset space ~
42403 \begin_inset space ~
42410 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
42413 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
42416 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42428 \begin_inset space ~
42433 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
42434 which is useful for presentations.
42437 \begin_layout Standard
42439 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
42441 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
42449 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
42450 you can customize the
42451 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
42453 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
42457 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
42459 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
42463 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
42465 and you can specify
42468 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
42470 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
42471 will look and if links for
42473 bibliographical backreferences are created
42474 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
42480 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
42481 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
42487 \begin_inset space ~
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42495 \begin_inset space ~
42500 option allows long links to be split;
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42508 \begin_inset space ~
42512 \begin_inset space ~
42520 \begin_inset space ~
42525 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
42529 \begin_inset space ~
42534 colors the different links.
42535 The default colors are:
42538 \begin_layout Labeling
42539 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42544 for hyperlinks and URLs
42547 \begin_layout Labeling
42548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42556 \begin_layout Labeling
42557 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42565 \begin_layout Standard
42566 but you can change these in the
42567 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
42569 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
42575 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
42577 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
42584 in this document they were changed with the
42585 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
42589 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
42599 \begin_layout Quote
42608 \begin_layout Standard
42610 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
42616 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
42618 depending on the option selected,
42619 the number of the section,
42620 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
42625 \begin_layout Standard
42630 you can specify if PDF
42631 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
42633 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
42637 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
42638 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
42640 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
42641 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
42643 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
42645 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
42649 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
42655 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
42657 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
42659 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
42662 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
42670 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
42671 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
42672 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
42673 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
42677 \begin_inset space ~
42680 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42682 \begin_inset space ~
42685 1 will only display the sections
42686 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42687 (collapsing the rest)
42690 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42694 \begin_layout Standard
42696 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42701 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42702 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42709 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42710 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42711 \begin_inset Flex Code
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42716 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42727 not via the package options.
42728 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42729 If you need to use one of those options,
42730 you can set them by adding
42733 \begin_layout Quote
42735 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42738 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42739 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42741 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42747 \begin_layout Standard
42749 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42752 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42753 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42756 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42761 \begin_layout Standard
42763 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42768 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42770 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42771 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42772 input is simply ignored).
42773 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42779 At the point of writing this,
42780 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42782 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42785 but it is expected that in the future,
42786 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42789 \begin_layout Standard
42791 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42792 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42793 When you look in its document settings,
42794 you can see that some additional
42799 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42800 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42812 \begin_layout Section
42814 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42818 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42825 \begin_layout Subsection
42828 \begin_inset Index idx
42833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42841 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42843 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42850 \begin_layout Standard
42851 As \SpecialChar LyX
42852 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42854 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42855 commands and constructs,
42858 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42859 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42860 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42861 -package for every problem,
42862 though \SpecialChar LyX
42863 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42866 \begin_layout Standard
42868 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42869 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42870 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42873 Code box is created by the menu
42875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42882 or by the toolbar button
42895 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42902 \begin_layout Standard
42903 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42905 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42908 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42913 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42918 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42926 you can write the command part
42932 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42933 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42937 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42938 Code box behind the word.
42939 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42940 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42943 \begin_layout Standard
42944 \begin_inset Graphics
42945 filename clipart/ERT.png
42953 \begin_layout Standard
42957 \begin_layout Standard
42958 This is a line with a
42962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42995 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42996 -commands without parameters,
42997 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42998 know that the command is finished.
43006 \begin_layout Subsection
43007 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43009 \begin_inset Argument 1
43012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43013 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
43020 \begin_inset Index idx
43025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43035 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
43042 \begin_layout Standard
43043 When you write larger documents or books,
43044 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43045 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
43046 uses in the background.
43047 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
43048 is based on commands,
43050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43058 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
43060 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
43061 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
43062 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
43063 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
43066 \begin_layout Standard
43067 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
43069 As mentioned above,
43070 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43072 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43075 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43085 \begin_layout Standard
43086 As result you find that the package
43091 \begin_inset Index idx
43096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43099 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
43117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43120 \SpecialChar menuseparator
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43137 usepackage[options]{package name}
43140 \begin_layout Standard
43141 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
43142 commands begin with a backslash,
43143 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
43144 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
43147 \begin_layout Standard
43148 In your case the package name is
43153 After a look in the documentation of the package,
43154 you know that the option
43158 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
43159 So you add the command
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43167 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
43170 \begin_layout Standard
43171 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
43175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43176 For more commands provided by the
43181 have a look at its documentation,
43183 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43198 \begin_layout Standard
43199 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
43200 For example if you use a
43205 you don't need the package
43210 you can instead write
43213 \begin_layout Standard
43218 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
43223 \begin_layout Standard
43224 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
43225 So if you plan to write a large document,
43226 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
43233 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
43236 \begin_layout Standard
43237 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
43238 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
43239 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43241 use the \SpecialChar TeX
43242 Code box as described in the previous section.
43245 \begin_layout Standard
43246 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
43248 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43250 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43252 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
43260 \begin_layout Standard
43261 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 \begin_inset Note Note
43284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43285 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
43293 \begin_layout Left Header
43294 \begin_inset Argument 1
43297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43317 \begin_inset Note Note
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43321 defines the header line as described below
43329 \begin_layout Center Header
43330 \begin_inset Argument 1
43333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43342 \begin_layout Right Header
43343 \begin_inset Argument 1
43346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43367 \begin_layout Left Footer
43368 \begin_inset Argument 1
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 \begin_layout Center Footer
43393 \begin_inset Argument 1
43396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43408 \begin_inset Newline newline
43412 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43418 \begin_layout Right Footer
43419 \begin_inset Argument 1
43422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43444 \begin_layout Section
43445 Customized Page Headers and Footers
43446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43448 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
43453 \begin_inset Index idx
43458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43460 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43475 \begin_inset Index idx
43480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43489 \begin_layout Standard
43490 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
43491 you need to set the
43494 \begin_inset space ~
43505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43517 As a second step add in the menu
43519 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43520 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43529 Custom Header/Footerlines
43532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43536 This module offers the following 6
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_layout Description
43545 \begin_inset space ~
43549 \begin_inset space ~
43553 \begin_inset space ~
43557 \begin_inset space ~
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_layout Description
43569 \begin_inset space ~
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43577 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_layout Standard
43592 for the different positions in the header/footer.
43593 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
43596 \begin_layout Standard
43598 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
43599 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
43601 \begin_inset space ~
43605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43607 reference "fig:Page-layout"
43612 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
43615 \begin_layout Standard
43616 \begin_inset Float figure
43623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43626 \begin_inset Tabular
43627 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
43628 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
43629 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43631 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43633 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
43645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43651 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43680 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43691 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43695 The normal text on the page goes here.
43696 The running header is above the text,
43697 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43698 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43699 title of the chapter,
43700 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43706 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43715 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43744 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43773 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43791 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43796 name "fig:Page-layout"
43800 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43813 \begin_layout Standard
43814 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43823 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43831 is set to “Default”.
43832 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43840 \begin_layout Subsection
43844 \begin_layout Standard
43845 To define your header line,
43846 add all three header environments.
43847 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43848 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43849 For single-sided documents,
43850 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43851 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43852 nothing appears in the output.
43853 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43856 \begin_layout Standard
43857 For the definition,
43858 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43859 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_layout Description
43875 thepage prints the current page number
43878 \begin_layout Description
43881 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43884 \begin_layout Description
43887 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43890 \begin_layout Description
43893 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43894 If the document has chapters,
43895 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43901 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43904 because it usually goes in a left header.
43907 \begin_layout Description
43910 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43911 If the document has chapters,
43912 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43913 It is normally used in the right header.
43916 \begin_layout Subsection
43917 Default header/footer
43920 \begin_layout Standard
43921 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43922 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43923 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43924 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43925 but leave it blank.
43927 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43931 \begin_inset space ~
43939 \begin_layout Subsection
43943 \begin_layout Standard
43944 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43945 Some pages are different.
43946 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43947 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43948 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43949 but that is normal.
43950 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43954 Header and footer decoration line
43957 \begin_layout Standard
43960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43963 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43964 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43976 in the following way:
43979 \begin_layout Standard
43986 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43989 \begin_layout Standard
43990 where thickness is a size in standard units like
44003 If you don't want a line,
44004 set the thickness to 0
44005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44011 \begin_layout Standard
44012 The lines can also be colored,
44013 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
44015 If you really need this,
44016 have a look at the Internet or in section
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44021 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44032 Several header/footer lines
44035 \begin_layout Standard
44036 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
44037 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
44039 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
44040 To expand the height,
44041 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44067 \begin_layout Standard
44074 headheight}{height}
44077 \begin_layout Standard
44082 is a size in standard units (e.
44083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44087 \begin_inset space \space{}
44095 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
44096 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
44097 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44098 logfile with the menu
44100 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44115 to see if you can find a warning about the package
44120 \begin_inset Index idx
44125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44128 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 If there is such a warning,
44144 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
44147 \begin_layout Subsection
44151 \begin_layout Standard
44152 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
44153 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
44154 This example consists of the following definition:
44157 \begin_layout Description
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44169 empty optional argument
44172 \begin_layout Description
44174 \begin_inset space ~
44178 empty optional argument
44181 \begin_layout Description
44183 \begin_inset space ~
44193 in the optional argument
44196 \begin_layout Description
44198 \begin_inset space ~
44208 in the optional argument
44211 \begin_layout Description
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44231 \begin_inset Newline newline
44235 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
44239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44242 in the optional argument
44245 \begin_layout Description
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44257 empty optional argument
44260 \begin_layout Description
44263 headrulewidth set to 2
44264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44270 \begin_layout Standard
44271 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
44273 For more specialized features,
44276 see the manual of the
44282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44292 \begin_layout Standard
44293 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
44299 \begin_layout Standard
44303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 pagestyle{headings}
44313 \begin_inset Note Note
44316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44317 switches back to page style with the default headings
44325 \begin_layout Section
44326 Previewing Snippets of your Document
44327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44329 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44334 \begin_inset Index idx
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44346 \begin_inset Index idx
44351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44353 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44370 \begin_layout Standard
44372 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
44375 \begin_layout Subsection
44379 \begin_layout Standard
44380 To get previews working,
44381 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44387 \begin_inset Index idx
44392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44395 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44409 (on some systems named simply
44414 If it is not already installed,
44415 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
44418 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44425 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44427 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
44436 for \SpecialChar LyX
44437 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44438 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
44442 \begin_layout Subsection
44446 \begin_layout Standard
44447 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44448 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44450 activate the option
44453 \begin_inset space ~
44460 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44466 \begin_inset space ~
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44473 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
44480 \begin_inset space ~
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44498 is the multiplication factor for the size.
44501 \begin_layout Standard
44502 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44507 \begin_inset space ~
44515 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_layout Standard
44524 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
44525 and when you finish editing an inset.
44528 \begin_layout Standard
44529 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44538 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
44541 \begin_inset space ~
44547 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
44555 \begin_layout Subsection
44556 Selected document parts
44559 \begin_layout Standard
44560 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
44561 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
44562 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44565 insert a preview inset via the menu
44567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44571 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
44572 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
44573 If you click on the preview,
44574 you can edit the previewed stuff.
44577 \begin_layout Standard
44579 To create rotated boxes,
44580 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44587 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44599 is explained in section
44601 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
44606 \begin_inset space ~
44616 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
44617 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44618 the final rotated boxes,
44619 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
44620 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
44621 Here is the result:
44624 \begin_layout Standard
44625 \begin_inset Preview
44627 \begin_layout Standard
44632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
44642 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
44652 height_special "totalheight"
44657 backgroundcolor "none"
44660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44685 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44691 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44713 \begin_layout Standard
44714 Previewing works also for colors.
44715 In this example a special framed,
44716 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44734 is explained in section
44741 \begin_inset space ~
44754 \begin_layout Standard
44755 \begin_inset Preview
44757 \begin_layout Standard
44761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44780 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44785 This is text within a colored,
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44805 \begin_layout Standard
44806 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44812 \begin_layout Standard
44813 If \SpecialChar LyX
44814 does not show a preview,
44815 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44816 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44817 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44819 If \SpecialChar LyX
44820 cannot create a preview,
44821 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44823 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44824 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44825 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44828 \begin_layout Subsection
44833 \begin_layout Standard
44834 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44835 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44838 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44845 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44847 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44848 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44850 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44851 To view the whole document as source,
44852 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44858 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44860 but note that if you have several documents open,
44861 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44863 not just the one which is open at the time.
44866 \begin_layout Section
44867 Advanced Find and Replace
44868 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44870 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44875 \begin_inset Index idx
44880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 \begin_inset Index idx
44892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44901 \begin_layout Subsection
44905 \begin_layout Standard
44906 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44907 allows for searching of complex,
44908 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44910 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44911 The key-features are:
44914 \begin_layout Itemize
44915 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44916 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44917 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44918 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44921 \begin_layout Itemize
44922 Search may be format-insensitive,
44923 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44926 and even mathematics),
44927 or it may be format-sensitive,
44930 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44933 \begin_layout Itemize
44934 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44935 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44938 \begin_layout Itemize
44939 Search may be widened to a specific
44945 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44952 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44953 all the open files,
44954 or all the manuals available from the
44961 \begin_layout Itemize
44962 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44963 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44968 \begin_inset space ~
44973 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44976 \begin_layout Subsection
44980 \begin_layout Standard
44981 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44983 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44996 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44999 ) or the toolbar button
45002 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45008 Advanced Find and Replace
45013 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45017 \begin_layout Standard
45023 mini-editor a simple word,
45024 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
45027 \begin_inset space ~
45032 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
45035 arg "paragraph-break"
45039 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
45041 bold or normal face,
45042 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
45046 arg "paragraph-break"
45049 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
45053 searches backwards.
45056 \begin_layout Standard
45060 \begin_inset space ~
45065 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
45073 \begin_inset space ~
45078 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
45081 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45082 Searching for mathematics
45085 \begin_layout Standard
45086 Mathematical formulas,
45088 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
45091 or something more complex like
45092 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
45096 may be searched for by typing them in the
45101 When searching for a formula,
45102 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
45103 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
45104 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
45110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45114 \begin_layout Standard
45115 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
45116 This is done by switching to the
45120 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
45133 \begin_layout Itemize
45134 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
45137 \begin_layout Itemize
45138 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
45139 and within the same text style only.
45142 \begin_layout Itemize
45143 a normal word in a section heading,
45144 and searching for it,
45145 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
45147 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
45148 in addition to a section style,
45149 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
45152 \begin_layout Itemize
45153 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
45156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45160 \begin_layout Standard
45161 The entries made in the
45165 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
45168 \begin_inset space ~
45174 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
45179 button or alternatively press
45182 arg "paragraph-break"
45189 while the cursor is in the
45192 \begin_inset space ~
45200 \begin_layout Standard
45201 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
45203 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
45206 \begin_layout Itemize
45207 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
45208 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
45209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45216 with its typewriter version
45217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45231 \begin_layout Itemize
45232 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
45233 for example replacing occurrences of
45234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45238 \begin_inset Formula $R$
45242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45250 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
45254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45257 (you may want to enable the
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45273 options and disable the
45282 in order to avoid replacing all
45283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45290 letters occurring in normal text),
45292 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
45296 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
45301 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
45305 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
45311 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45315 \begin_layout Standard
45316 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
45320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
45323 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45325 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
45335 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
45340 This is done with the context menu
45342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45343 Insert Regular Expression
45345 while the cursor is in the
45350 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45355 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
45358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45362 \begin_inset space ~
45365 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
45367 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
45373 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
45374 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
45375 Examples of using such a feature may be:
45378 \begin_layout Enumerate
45379 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
45385 editor the fraction
45386 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
45390 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45393 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
45396 \begin_layout Enumerate
45397 Searching for all text with a given style:
45400 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
45404 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814407
45408 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
45409 Adhere to search string formatting of
45410 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814409
45412 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
45418 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45420 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814412
45422 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45426 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814414
45430 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45432 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814534
45434 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814534
45438 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814548
45444 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814554
45445 in this section pressed
45451 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45456 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
45457 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
45460 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45463 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
45464 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
45466 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
45467 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
45471 \begin_layout Description
45473 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45474 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
45475 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814961
45477 as with the other options,
45478 the setting of the search string)
45479 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45483 \begin_layout Description
45485 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
45487 \begin_inset space ~
45490 color colored text like cyan,
45495 \begin_layout Description
45497 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
45499 \begin_inset space ~
45507 \begin_layout Description
45509 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
45511 \begin_inset space ~
45518 \begin_layout Description
45520 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
45522 \begin_inset space ~
45531 \begin_layout Description
45533 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
45535 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_layout Description
45546 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
45547 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
45552 \begin_layout Description
45554 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
45561 \begin_layout Description
45563 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
45564 Strike-through Single,
45568 \begin_layout Description
45570 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
45571 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
45574 \begin_layout Description
45576 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45591 \begin_layout Standard
45593 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
45594 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
45595 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45599 and referring back to them through
45600 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45605 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
45611 try searching with the regexp
45612 \begin_inset Newline newline
45616 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
45628 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
45629 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
45634 \begin_inset Newline newline
45637 in order to find word repetitions,
45641 \begin_layout Standard
45642 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
45643 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
45649 \begin_layout Standard
45650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45659 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
45660 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
45661 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
45663 \begin_inset space ~
45667 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45670 always refers to the first occurrence of
45671 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45674 in all entered regexps.
45682 \begin_layout Section
45684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45686 name "sec:Spellchecking"
45691 \begin_inset Index idx
45696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 \begin_layout Standard
45707 has a built-in spell checker.
45710 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45718 key or the toolbar button
45721 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45724 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45725 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45726 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45727 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45728 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45729 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45730 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45731 if any could be found.
45732 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45737 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45738 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45741 \begin_layout Standard
45743 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45749 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45751 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45752 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45755 \begin_inset space ~
45763 arg "dialog-show character"
45766 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45768 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45771 \begin_layout Standard
45772 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45773 can be downloaded from here:
45774 \begin_inset Newline newline
45778 \begin_inset Flex URL
45781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45783 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45785 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45786 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45787 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45795 \begin_inset Newline newline
45799 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45801 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45802 You should download
45805 \begin_inset space ~
45808 files for each language
45809 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45814 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45817 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45819 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45823 \begin_inset space ~
45826 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45827 's installation subfolder
45835 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45837 \begin_inset Newline newline
45840 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45841 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45842 but in most cases these are
45862 is the language code.
45865 \begin_layout Subsection
45869 \begin_layout Standard
45872 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45873 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45875 \begin_inset space ~
45878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45881 you can set the following things:
45884 \begin_layout Description
45886 \begin_inset space ~
45889 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45890 should use for spell checking.
45891 Depending on your platform,
45902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45903 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45904 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45919 \begin_inset space ~
45922 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45925 \begin_layout Description
45927 \begin_inset space ~
45930 language If this field is not empty,
45932 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45933 no matter what the document language is.
45936 \begin_layout Description
45938 \begin_inset space ~
45941 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45947 \begin_inset space \space{}
45951 This should normally not be needed.
45954 \begin_layout Description
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45960 \begin_inset space ~
45963 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45974 \begin_layout Description
45976 \begin_inset space ~
45979 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45980 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45981 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45982 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45983 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45986 \begin_layout Description
45988 \begin_inset space ~
45992 \begin_inset space ~
45996 \begin_inset space ~
45999 comments If enabled,
46000 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
46003 \begin_layout Section
46005 \begin_inset Index idx
46010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46019 name "sec:Thesaurus"
46026 \begin_layout Standard
46028 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
46029 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
46030 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46039 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46041 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
46052 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
46056 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
46057 which are available for many languages.
46060 \begin_layout Standard
46061 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
46065 \begin_layout Subsection
46066 Setting up the thesaurus
46069 \begin_layout Standard
46078 thesauri consist of two files per language:
46079 A file with the suffix
46083 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
46088 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
46089 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46093 \begin_inset space ~
46102 the US English files are named:
46105 \begin_layout Itemize
46109 \begin_layout Itemize
46113 \begin_layout Standard
46122 and its thesaurus installed,
46123 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
46126 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46127 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46128 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46135 ) to the path where they are installed.
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46141 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
46142 typical locations are
46149 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
46154 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
46159 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
46163 dictionaries are to be found at
46169 LibreOffice-<Version>
46177 the default location is
46179 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
46180 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
46181 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
46182 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
46183 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
46184 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
46193 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
46194 installation process,
46195 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
46198 \begin_layout Standard
46199 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
46201 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
46203 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
46206 thesaurus dictionaries,
46207 you can download them from here:
46208 \begin_inset Newline newline
46212 \begin_inset Flex URL
46215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
46219 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
46220 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
46221 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
46231 \begin_layout Standard
46232 To install a new dictionary,
46233 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
46235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46236 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46237 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46239 \begin_inset space ~
46244 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
46246 If this path is not defined yet,
46247 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
46251 \begin_layout Standard
46253 you can also install new dictionaries via
46255 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
46260 via your package manager (look for
46266 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
46270 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
46271 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
46273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46279 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46280 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46281 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
46283 \begin_inset space ~
46288 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
46291 \begin_layout Subsection
46292 Using the thesaurus
46295 \begin_layout Standard
46296 To start the thesaurus,
46299 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46302 or the toolbar button
46305 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46308 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
46309 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
46310 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
46312 for some languages (such as English),
46313 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
46314 but also generic terms (such as
46323 related terms (such as
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46339 \begin_inset space ~
46349 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
46359 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
46362 \begin_layout Standard
46363 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
46364 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
46365 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
46368 \begin_layout Standard
46369 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
46375 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
46377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46381 \begin_inset space \space{}
46384 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
46385 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
46386 infinitive for verbs).
46388 looking up the word form
46393 while results are shown for the word form
46398 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
46399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46403 \begin_inset space \space{}
46415 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
46416 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
46417 thus the ending remains).
46420 \begin_layout Section
46422 \begin_inset Index idx
46427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 \begin_inset Index idx
46439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46441 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46458 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
46465 \begin_layout Standard
46466 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
46467 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
46468 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
46470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46472 \begin_inset space ~
46475 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46477 \begin_inset space ~
46485 \begin_layout Standard
46486 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
46501 The color depends on the author that made the change.
46502 You can change the color in
46504 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46505 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46507 \begin_inset space ~
46511 \begin_inset space ~
46516 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46522 \begin_inset Index idx
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46529 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46543 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
46544 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
46545 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
46548 arg "changes-merge"
46554 \begin_layout Standard
46555 When change tracking is activated,
46556 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
46558 \begin_inset Index idx
46563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46565 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46582 \begin_layout Standard
46583 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46589 \begin_layout Standard
46590 \begin_inset Graphics
46591 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
46599 \begin_layout Standard
46600 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46606 \begin_layout Standard
46607 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
46610 \begin_layout Standard
46611 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46617 \begin_layout Standard
46618 \begin_inset Tabular
46619 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
46620 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46621 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46622 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46632 arg "changes-track"
46640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46646 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46648 \begin_inset space ~
46651 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46671 arg "changes-output"
46679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46690 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46692 \begin_inset space ~
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46700 \begin_inset space ~
46709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46730 Jumps to the next change
46736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 arg "change-accept"
46753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46759 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46761 \begin_inset space ~
46764 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46775 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46784 arg "change-reject"
46792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46798 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46800 \begin_inset space ~
46803 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46805 \begin_inset space ~
46814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46823 arg "changes-merge"
46831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46839 \begin_inset space ~
46842 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46844 \begin_inset space ~
46853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46862 arg "all-changes-accept"
46870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46878 \begin_inset space ~
46881 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46883 \begin_inset space ~
46887 \begin_inset space ~
46896 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46905 arg "all-changes-reject"
46913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46919 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46924 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46926 \begin_inset space ~
46930 \begin_inset space ~
46939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46963 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46965 \begin_inset space ~
46974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46997 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47015 \begin_layout Standard
47016 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47022 \begin_layout Standard
47023 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
47024 especially no format changes like from
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
47046 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
47047 When you merge changes,
47048 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
47049 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
47050 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
47051 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
47054 \begin_layout Standard
47055 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
47058 \begin_layout Standard
47060 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
47061 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47067 \begin_inset Index idx
47072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47075 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47090 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
47093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47100 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47106 \begin_layout Section
47107 Comparison of Documents
47108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47110 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47115 \begin_inset Index idx
47120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 Comparison of documents
47129 \begin_layout Standard
47130 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
47133 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47137 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
47138 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
47139 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
47140 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47147 \begin_inset space ~
47151 \begin_inset space ~
47160 \begin_inset space ~
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47168 \begin_inset space ~
47172 \begin_inset space ~
47176 \begin_inset space ~
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47185 enables the change tracking option
47188 \begin_inset space ~
47192 \begin_inset space ~
47196 \begin_inset space ~
47201 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
47204 \begin_layout Section
47205 International Support
47206 \begin_inset Index idx
47211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47212 International support
47220 \begin_layout Standard
47221 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
47222 with any language you want.
47223 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47226 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47228 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
47236 \begin_layout Standard
47239 also supports phonetic symbols,
47241 \begin_inset space ~
47245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47247 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
47255 \begin_layout Subsection
47257 \begin_inset Index idx
47262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47279 \begin_inset Index idx
47284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47301 \begin_inset Index idx
47306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47308 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47325 \begin_layout Standard
47328 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47329 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47332 dialog lets you set
47335 the quote style and character encoding
47340 \begin_layout Standard
47345 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47350 \begin_inset space ~
47355 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
47356 For details about the different encoding options see section
47357 \begin_inset space ~
47361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47363 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47371 \begin_layout Subsection
47372 Keyboard mapping configuration
47373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47375 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
47382 \begin_layout Standard
47383 If you have for example a U.
47384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47387 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
47388 you can use an alternate keymap.
47390 if you want to write in Italian,
47391 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
47392 to use an Italian keymap.
47395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47396 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47397 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
47400 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
47402 \begin_inset space ~
47406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47408 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47414 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
47417 \begin_layout Standard
47419 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
47423 normally write in Italian on a U.
47424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47427 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
47429 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
47430 This and many other customizations are explained in the
47437 \begin_layout Chapter
47440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47442 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
47449 \begin_layout Standard
47450 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
47451 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
47454 \begin_layout Section
47456 \begin_inset Index idx
47461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47463 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47480 \begin_layout Standard
47485 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
47488 \begin_layout Subsection
47492 \begin_layout Standard
47493 Creates a new document.
47496 \begin_layout Subsection
47500 \begin_layout Standard
47501 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
47502 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
47503 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
47505 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
47507 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
47512 \begin_layout Subsection
47516 \begin_layout Standard
47520 \begin_layout Subsection
47524 \begin_layout Standard
47525 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
47526 Click there on a file to open it.
47529 \begin_layout Subsection
47531 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
47535 \begin_layout Standard
47537 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
47538 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
47542 \begin_layout Subsection
47546 \begin_layout Standard
47547 Closes the current document.
47550 \begin_layout Subsection
47554 \begin_layout Standard
47555 Closes all opened documents.
47558 \begin_layout Subsection
47562 \begin_layout Standard
47563 Saves the actual document.
47566 \begin_layout Subsection
47570 \begin_layout Standard
47571 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
47572 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
47576 \begin_layout Subsection
47578 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
47582 \begin_layout Standard
47584 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
47585 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
47590 \begin_layout Subsection
47594 \begin_layout Standard
47595 Saves all opened documents.
47598 \begin_layout Subsection
47602 \begin_layout Standard
47603 Reloads the actual document from disk.
47606 \begin_layout Subsection
47610 \begin_layout Standard
47611 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
47612 It is described in the section
47614 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
47619 Additional Features
47624 \begin_layout Subsection
47628 \begin_layout Standard
47629 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
47635 plain text files and comma separated,
47636 table-like text files (CSV).
47637 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
47641 \begin_layout Standard
47642 When using the menu entry
47645 \begin_inset space ~
47651 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
47652 when using the menu entry
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47663 \begin_inset space ~
47669 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
47670 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
47673 \begin_layout Subsection
47675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47677 name "subsec:Export"
47684 \begin_layout Standard
47685 You can export your document to various file formats.
47686 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47688 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
47689 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
47690 during its configuration.
47693 \begin_layout Standard
47694 Here is a list of all available entries;
47695 some of them are explained in detail in section
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47702 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47710 \begin_layout Description
47716 \begin_inset space ~
47719 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47721 \begin_inset space ~
47724 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47725 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47726 \begin_inset Newline newline
47729 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47730 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47734 \begin_layout Description
47735 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47740 \begin_layout Description
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47745 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47750 \begin_layout Description
47751 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47752 's native DVI-format.
47753 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47755 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47762 \begin_layout Description
47763 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47766 \begin_layout Description
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47775 ) DVI-format using the program
47777 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47781 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47786 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47795 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47803 \begin_layout Description
47805 \begin_inset space ~
47808 (cropped) the same as
47812 but with cropped page margins.
47815 \begin_layout Description
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47820 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47824 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47829 \begin_layout Description
47834 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47843 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47851 \begin_layout Description
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47857 \begin_inset space ~
47860 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47865 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47872 \begin_layout Description
47876 \begin_inset space ~
47885 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47886 source that is compilable with the program
47888 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47892 \begin_layout Description
47896 \begin_inset space ~
47901 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47903 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47913 \begin_layout Description
47917 \begin_inset space ~
47922 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47924 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47925 only this format is readable by the
47932 \begin_layout Description
47936 \begin_inset space ~
47945 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47946 source that is compilable with the program
47952 \begin_layout Description
47954 \begin_inset space ~
47958 \begin_inset space ~
47965 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47966 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47971 \begin_layout Description
47973 \begin_inset space ~
47976 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47977 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47983 \begin_inset space \space{}
47988 \begin_inset space ~
47993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48008 represent the version number)
48011 \begin_layout Description
48013 \begin_inset space ~
48017 \begin_inset space ~
48020 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
48022 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48027 \begin_layout Description
48028 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
48029 's internal XHTML engine
48032 \begin_layout Description
48034 \begin_inset space ~
48038 \begin_inset space ~
48042 \begin_inset space ~
48046 \begin_inset space ~
48049 XML Office Open XML file,
48055 For the conversion the program
48064 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48067 \begin_layout Description
48068 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
48073 \begin_layout Description
48075 \begin_inset space ~
48078 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
48088 For the conversion the program
48097 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48100 \begin_layout Description
48102 \begin_inset space ~
48105 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
48106 For the conversion the program
48115 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
48118 \begin_layout Description
48120 \begin_inset space ~
48123 (cropped) the same as
48126 \begin_inset space ~
48131 but with cropped page margins
48134 \begin_layout Description
48138 \begin_inset space ~
48143 PDF-format using the program
48148 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
48151 \begin_layout Description
48155 \begin_inset space ~
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48167 \begin_inset space ~
48172 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
48173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48177 \begin_inset space \space{}
48180 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
48183 \begin_layout Description
48187 \begin_inset space ~
48192 PDF-format using the program
48194 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48198 produces PDF-files directly
48201 \begin_layout Description
48205 \begin_inset space ~
48210 PDF-format using the program
48215 produces PDF-files directly
48218 \begin_layout Description
48222 \begin_inset space ~
48227 PDF-format using the program
48232 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
48235 \begin_layout Description
48239 \begin_inset space ~
48244 PDF-format using the program
48250 produces PDF-files directly
48253 \begin_layout Description
48257 \begin_inset space ~
48265 \begin_layout Description
48269 \begin_inset space ~
48273 \begin_inset space ~
48279 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
48284 \begin_layout Description
48289 PostScript format using the program
48298 options see section
48299 \begin_inset space ~
48303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48305 reference "subsec:General-output"
48313 \begin_layout Description
48314 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48315 source and also code in the statistical programming language
48328 it is possible to use
48332 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48336 \begin_layout Standard
48337 If one of the menu entries
48345 \begin_inset space ~
48355 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48357 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
48360 \begin_inset space ~
48364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48366 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48372 \begin_inset Index idx
48377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48378 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48387 \begin_layout Subsection
48391 \begin_layout Standard
48392 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
48395 \begin_inset space ~
48399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48401 reference "sec:Paths"
48407 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
48416 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
48417 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
48418 's preferences as described in section
48419 \begin_inset space ~
48423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48425 reference "subsec:Converters"
48433 \begin_layout Subsection
48434 New and Close Window
48437 \begin_layout Standard
48438 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48442 \begin_layout Subsection
48446 \begin_layout Standard
48447 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
48450 \begin_layout Section
48452 \begin_inset Index idx
48457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48476 \begin_layout Subsection
48480 \begin_layout Standard
48481 Described in section
48482 \begin_inset space ~
48486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48488 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
48496 \begin_layout Subsection
48504 \begin_layout Standard
48505 Described in section
48506 \begin_inset space ~
48510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48512 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48520 \begin_layout Subsection
48524 \begin_layout Standard
48525 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
48526 If the cursor is outside an inset,
48527 the whole document will be selected.
48530 \begin_layout Subsection
48534 \begin_layout Standard
48535 Selects the whole document.
48538 \begin_layout Subsection
48539 Find & Replace (Quick)
48542 \begin_layout Standard
48543 Described in section
48544 \begin_inset space ~
48548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48550 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48558 \begin_layout Subsection
48559 Find & Replace (Advanced)
48562 \begin_layout Standard
48563 Described in section
48564 \begin_inset space ~
48568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48570 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
48578 \begin_layout Subsection
48579 Move Paragraph Up/Down
48582 \begin_layout Standard
48583 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
48586 \begin_layout Subsection
48588 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48592 \begin_layout Standard
48594 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48595 Described in section
48596 \begin_inset space ~
48600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48602 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48612 \begin_layout Subsection
48614 \begin_inset Index idx
48619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48621 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48638 \begin_layout Standard
48639 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
48640 line spacing and label width.
48641 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
48644 \begin_layout Standard
48645 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
48651 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48652 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48654 \begin_inset space ~
48660 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
48664 \begin_layout Subsection
48666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
48670 \begin_layout Standard
48672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48673 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
48677 \begin_layout Enumerate
48679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
48680 Customize text properties by means of the
48686 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
48690 this is described in section
48691 \begin_inset space ~
48695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48697 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48705 \begin_layout Enumerate
48707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
48708 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
48710 Apply last settings
48713 \begin_layout Enumerate
48715 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48716 Change the casing of selected text (
48733 \begin_layout Subsection
48735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48739 \begin_layout Standard
48741 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48742 This sub-menu only appears
48743 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48746 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48772 \begin_inset space ~
48776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48778 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48788 \begin_layout Subsection
48789 Table and Rows & Columns
48792 \begin_layout Standard
48793 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48794 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48795 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48798 \begin_layout Subsection
48802 \begin_layout Standard
48803 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48804 It will dissolve this inset.
48805 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48808 \begin_layout Subsection
48812 \begin_layout Standard
48813 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48814 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48817 \begin_layout Subsection
48818 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48821 \begin_layout Standard
48822 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48823 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48824 \begin_inset space ~
48828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48830 reference "sec:Nesting"
48836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48838 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48846 \begin_layout Section
48848 \begin_inset Index idx
48853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48872 \begin_layout Standard
48873 At the bottom of the
48877 menu the opened documents are listed.
48880 \begin_layout Subsection
48881 Open/Close all Insets
48884 \begin_layout Standard
48885 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48888 \begin_layout Subsection
48889 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48892 \begin_layout Standard
48893 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48896 \begin_layout Standard
48897 Math macros are described in the
48904 \begin_layout Subsection
48908 \begin_layout Standard
48909 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48910 \begin_inset space ~
48914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48916 reference "sec:Navigating"
48922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48924 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48932 \begin_layout Subsection
48936 \begin_layout Standard
48937 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48938 as described in section
48939 \begin_inset space ~
48943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48945 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48953 \begin_layout Subsection
48957 \begin_layout Standard
48958 Opens a window showing console messages.
48959 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48965 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48966 is processing the document.
48969 \begin_layout Subsection
48971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48973 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48978 \begin_inset Index idx
48983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48992 \begin_layout Standard
48993 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48994 All toolbars and the
48997 \begin_inset space ~
49015 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
49017 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
49019 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
49023 \begin_layout Standard
49025 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
49029 \begin_inset space ~
49050 \begin_inset space ~
49063 \begin_inset space ~
49068 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
49071 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
49076 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
49078 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
49093 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
49094 denoted in the menu with the suffix
49103 \begin_layout Standard
49108 state the toolbar is permanently shown
49109 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
49115 state it is never shown
49122 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
49123 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
49124 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
49125 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
49127 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
49132 \begin_layout Standard
49134 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
49135 \begin_inset space ~
49139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49141 reference "sec:Toolbars"
49149 \begin_layout Subsection
49153 \begin_layout Standard
49157 \begin_inset space ~
49161 \begin_inset space ~
49165 \begin_inset space ~
49169 \begin_inset space ~
49173 \begin_inset space ~
49177 \begin_inset space ~
49182 will split \SpecialChar LyX
49183 's main window vertically while
49186 \begin_inset space ~
49190 \begin_inset space ~
49194 \begin_inset space ~
49198 \begin_inset space ~
49202 \begin_inset space ~
49206 \begin_inset space ~
49211 will split it horizontally.
49212 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
49213 or to view the same document,
49214 but at different positions.
49215 You can even split the main window several times to view,
49217 three or more documents at the same time.
49218 To close a split view,
49222 \begin_inset space ~
49226 \begin_inset space ~
49234 \begin_layout Subsection
49238 \begin_layout Standard
49239 Closes a split view.
49242 \begin_layout Subsection
49246 \begin_layout Standard
49247 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
49248 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
49249 's main window fullscreen.
49250 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
49252 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
49255 \begin_layout Section
49257 \begin_inset Index idx
49262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49281 \begin_layout Subsection
49285 \begin_layout Standard
49286 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
49287 \begin_inset space ~
49291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49293 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
49305 \begin_layout Subsection
49307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49309 name "subsec:Special-Character"
49316 \begin_layout Standard
49317 Here you can insert the following characters:
49320 \begin_layout Description
49325 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49327 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
49328 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49329 -packages you have installed.
49330 You can get a complete display by checking
49333 \begin_inset space ~
49339 \begin_inset Newline newline
49343 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49352 Not all characters will be visible in the
49356 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
49357 \begin_inset space ~
49361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49363 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49368 ) can display every character.
49376 \begin_layout Description
49377 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
49382 \begin_layout Description
49384 \begin_inset space ~
49388 \begin_inset space ~
49391 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
49392 \begin_inset space ~
49396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49398 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
49406 \begin_layout Description
49408 \begin_inset space ~
49411 Quote Inserts this quote:
49413 no matter what quote style you selected in the
49415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49416 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49422 \begin_layout Description
49424 \begin_inset space ~
49427 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
49429 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49430 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49436 \begin_layout Description
49438 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
49440 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
49444 \begin_inset space ~
49447 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
49448 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
49450 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
49454 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
49458 \begin_layout Description
49460 \begin_inset space ~
49463 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
49464 \SpecialChar breakableslash
49468 \begin_layout Description
49470 \begin_inset space ~
49474 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
49475 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
49481 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49486 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49492 \begin_inset space \space{}
49495 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49496 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49506 To insert a fraction use the command
49511 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49515 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49524 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49531 \begin_layout Description
49533 \begin_inset space ~
49536 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
49537 \SpecialChar menuseparator
49541 \begin_layout Description
49543 \begin_inset space ~
49547 \begin_inset Index idx
49552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49559 \begin_inset Index idx
49564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49566 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49580 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
49581 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49587 \begin_inset Index idx
49592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49610 \begin_inset Newline newline
49613 More information about this feature can be found in the
49619 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49625 \begin_layout Description
49626 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
49631 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
49635 \begin_layout Subsection
49639 \begin_layout Standard
49640 Opens a submenu with the following options:
49643 \begin_layout Description
49644 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
49646 \begin_inset script superscript
49648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49658 \begin_layout Description
49659 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
49661 \begin_inset script subscript
49663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49672 \begin_layout Description
49674 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
49676 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
49680 \begin_inset space ~
49684 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
49686 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
49689 space as described in section
49690 \begin_inset space ~
49694 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49696 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
49704 \begin_layout Description
49706 \begin_inset space ~
49709 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
49710 \begin_inset space ~
49714 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49718 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49724 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49728 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49738 \begin_layout Description
49740 \begin_inset space ~
49743 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49744 \begin_inset space ~
49748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49750 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49758 \begin_layout Description
49760 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49762 \begin_inset space ~
49765 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49767 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49771 \begin_inset space \space{}
49774 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49775 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49785 To insert a fraction use the command
49790 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49794 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49803 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49812 \begin_layout Description
49814 \begin_inset space ~
49817 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49818 \begin_inset space ~
49822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49824 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49832 \begin_layout Description
49834 \begin_inset space ~
49837 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49838 \begin_inset space ~
49842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49844 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49852 \begin_layout Description
49854 \begin_inset space ~
49857 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49858 \begin_inset space ~
49862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49864 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49872 \begin_layout Description
49873 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49874 \begin_inset space ~
49878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49880 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49888 \begin_layout Description
49890 \begin_inset space ~
49893 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49894 \begin_inset space ~
49898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49900 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49908 \begin_layout Description
49910 \begin_inset space ~
49913 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49914 \begin_inset space ~
49918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49920 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49928 \begin_layout Description
49930 \begin_inset space ~
49934 \begin_inset space ~
49937 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49939 \begin_inset space ~
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49945 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49953 for a usage example.
49956 \begin_layout Description
49958 \begin_inset space ~
49962 \begin_inset space ~
49965 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49966 \begin_inset space ~
49970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49972 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49980 \begin_layout Description
49982 \begin_inset space ~
49985 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49986 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49989 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49990 \begin_inset space ~
49994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49996 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
50004 \begin_layout Description
50006 \begin_inset space ~
50009 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
50010 \begin_inset space ~
50014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50016 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
50024 \begin_layout Description
50026 \begin_inset space ~
50029 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
50030 as described in section
50031 \begin_inset space ~
50035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50037 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
50043 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
50047 \begin_layout Description
50049 \change_deleted 5863208 1686701518
50051 \change_inserted 5863208 1686701520
50053 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
50055 \begin_inset space ~
50059 \begin_inset space ~
50062 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
50063 to prevent a page break at the given position.
50065 \begin_inset space ~
50069 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
50071 \begin_inset space ~
50075 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
50077 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50079 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
50089 \begin_layout Description
50091 \begin_inset space ~
50094 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
50095 \begin_inset space ~
50099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50101 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
50109 \begin_layout Description
50111 \begin_inset space ~
50115 \begin_inset space ~
50118 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
50119 \begin_inset space ~
50123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50125 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
50133 \begin_layout Subsection
50135 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50139 \begin_layout Standard
50141 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50142 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
50143 The submenu allows you to insert
50146 \begin_layout Description
50148 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50150 \begin_inset space ~
50153 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
50156 \begin_layout Description
50158 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50160 \begin_inset space ~
50164 \begin_inset space ~
50167 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
50170 \begin_layout Description
50172 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50174 \begin_inset space ~
50177 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
50180 \begin_layout Description
50182 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50184 \begin_inset space ~
50187 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
50190 \begin_layout Description
50192 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50194 \begin_inset space ~
50198 \begin_inset space ~
50201 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
50204 \begin_layout Description
50206 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50208 \begin_inset space ~
50211 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
50214 \begin_layout Description
50216 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
50218 \begin_inset space ~
50222 \begin_inset space ~
50226 \begin_inset space ~
50229 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
50232 \begin_layout Description
50234 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
50236 \begin_inset space ~
50240 \begin_inset space ~
50243 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
50245 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
50248 \begin_layout Description
50250 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50252 \begin_inset space ~
50255 Name inserts the user name as specified in
50257 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50258 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50264 \begin_layout Description
50266 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50268 \begin_inset space ~
50271 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
50273 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50274 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50280 \begin_layout Description
50282 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
50283 Other\SpecialChar ldots
50284 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
50287 \begin_layout Subsection
50290 List/Contents/References
50293 \begin_layout Standard
50294 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
50298 \begin_inset space ~
50322 are described in section
50323 \begin_inset space ~
50327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50329 reference "sec:toc"
50339 is described in section
50340 \begin_inset space ~
50344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50346 reference "sec:Index"
50356 is described in section
50357 \begin_inset space ~
50361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50363 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50370 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50373 is described in section
50374 \begin_inset space ~
50378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50380 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50388 \begin_layout Subsection
50392 \begin_layout Standard
50394 as described in section
50395 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50401 reference "sec:Floats"
50406 and in detail the chapter
50413 \begin_inset space ~
50421 \begin_layout Subsection
50425 \begin_layout Standard
50427 described in section
50428 \begin_inset space ~
50432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50434 reference "sec:Notes"
50442 \begin_layout Subsection
50446 \begin_layout Standard
50447 Inserts a branch inset,
50449 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
50450 Branches are described in section
50451 \begin_inset space ~
50455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50457 reference "sec:Branches"
50465 \begin_layout Subsection
50469 \begin_layout Standard
50470 Inserts document class-specific insets.
50471 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
50472 An example is the document class
50473 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
50475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50483 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
50487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50492 with three custom insets.
50495 Flex insets and InsetLayout
50499 Installing New Document Classes,
50500 The Layout file format
50506 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
50509 \begin_layout Subsection
50511 \begin_inset Index idx
50516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50525 \begin_layout Standard
50526 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
50527 For more information see chapter
50529 External Document Parts
50532 \begin_inset space ~
50538 \begin_layout Subsection
50540 \begin_inset Index idx
50545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50554 \begin_layout Standard
50555 Inserts a box in a certain style.
50556 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
50563 \begin_inset space ~
50571 \begin_layout Subsection
50575 \begin_layout Standard
50580 dialog as described in section
50581 \begin_inset space ~
50585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50587 reference "sec:Bibliography"
50595 \begin_layout Subsection
50599 \begin_layout Standard
50604 as described in section
50605 \begin_inset space ~
50609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50611 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50619 \begin_layout Subsection
50623 \begin_layout Standard
50628 as described in section
50629 \begin_inset space ~
50633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50635 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50643 \begin_layout Subsection
50645 \begin_inset Index idx
50650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50657 \begin_inset Index idx
50662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50664 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50691 \begin_layout Standard
50692 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
50693 Floats are described in section
50694 \begin_inset space ~
50698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50700 reference "sec:Floats"
50706 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
50709 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
50717 \begin_inset space ~
50725 \begin_layout Subsection
50729 \begin_layout Standard
50730 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50731 \begin_inset space ~
50735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50737 reference "sec:Index"
50745 \begin_layout Subsection
50749 \begin_layout Standard
50750 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50751 \begin_inset space ~
50755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50757 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50765 \begin_layout Subsection
50769 \begin_layout Standard
50770 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50771 Tables are described in section
50772 \begin_inset space ~
50776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50778 reference "sec:Tables"
50783 and in detail in the chapter
50790 \begin_inset space ~
50798 \begin_layout Subsection
50802 \begin_layout Standard
50808 Graphics are described in section
50809 \begin_inset space ~
50813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50815 reference "sec:Graphics"
50823 \begin_layout Subsection
50827 \begin_layout Standard
50828 Inserts a URL as described in section
50829 \begin_inset space ~
50833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50835 reference "subsec:URLs"
50843 \begin_layout Subsection
50847 \begin_layout Standard
50848 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50849 \begin_inset space ~
50853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50855 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50863 \begin_layout Subsection
50867 \begin_layout Standard
50868 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50869 \begin_inset space ~
50873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50875 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50883 \begin_layout Subsection
50887 \begin_layout Standard
50888 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50889 \begin_inset space ~
50893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50895 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50903 \begin_layout Subsection
50906 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50909 \begin_layout Standard
50910 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50912 \begin_inset space ~
50916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50918 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50923 for an explanation.
50926 \begin_layout Subsection
50930 \begin_layout Standard
50931 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50932 in or behind a section heading,
50933 title or caption of a float.
50934 Inserts a short title as described in section
50935 \begin_inset space ~
50939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50941 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50949 \begin_layout Subsection
50954 \begin_layout Standard
50955 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50956 Code box as described in section
50957 \begin_inset space ~
50961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50963 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50971 \begin_layout Subsection
50973 \begin_inset Index idx
50978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50987 \begin_layout Standard
50988 Inserts a program listings box.
50989 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50991 Program Code Listings
50996 \begin_inset space ~
51004 \begin_layout Subsection
51006 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
51010 \begin_layout Standard
51012 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
51013 Inserts the actual date.
51014 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
51020 \begin_layout Subsection
51024 \begin_layout Standard
51025 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
51026 \begin_inset space ~
51030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51032 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51040 \begin_layout Section
51042 \begin_inset Index idx
51047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51066 \begin_layout Standard
51067 This menu lists the existing chapters,
51072 \begin_inset space ~
51075 of the current document.
51076 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
51079 \begin_layout Subsection
51083 \begin_layout Standard
51084 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
51085 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
51088 \begin_inset space ~
51092 To create bookmarks for this example,
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51097 2.5 and use the submenu
51100 \begin_inset space ~
51104 \begin_inset space ~
51111 \begin_inset space ~
51117 \begin_inset space ~
51121 \begin_inset space ~
51127 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
51130 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
51136 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
51139 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
51142 \begin_layout Standard
51144 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
51145 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
51151 \begin_inset space ~
51156 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
51159 \begin_inset space ~
51164 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
51167 \begin_layout Subsection
51173 \begin_layout Standard
51174 Jump to the next note,
51176 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
51179 \begin_layout Subsection
51183 \begin_layout Standard
51184 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
51185 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
51186 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
51189 \begin_inset space ~
51193 \begin_inset space ~
51201 \begin_layout Subsection
51205 \begin_layout Standard
51206 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
51209 The \SpecialChar LyX
51210 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
51212 \begin_inset space ~
51220 \begin_inset space ~
51225 manual for a detailed description.
51228 \begin_layout Section
51230 \begin_inset Index idx
51235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51237 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51254 \begin_layout Subsection
51258 \begin_layout Standard
51259 Change Tracking is described in section
51260 \begin_inset space ~
51264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51266 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51274 \begin_layout Subsection
51282 \begin_layout Standard
51283 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
51284 by viewing or exporting a document,
51285 this menu will be enabled.
51286 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51288 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
51290 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
51291 \begin_inset Newline newline
51294 With the help of the logfile,
51295 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51299 \begin_layout Standard
51302 Open Containing Directory
51304 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
51305 's temporary folder for the document.
51306 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
51307 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
51308 For example some journals require to send the
51312 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51316 \begin_layout Subsection
51317 Start Appendix Here
51320 \begin_layout Standard
51321 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
51322 \begin_inset space ~
51326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51328 reference "sec:Appendices"
51336 \begin_layout Subsection
51338 \begin_inset space ~
51344 \begin_layout Standard
51345 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
51347 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51348 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51349 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51351 \begin_inset space ~
51355 \begin_inset space ~
51362 \begin_inset space ~
51366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51368 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51373 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
51376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51377 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51379 \begin_inset space ~
51382 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51384 \begin_inset space ~
51387 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51389 \begin_inset space ~
51393 \begin_inset space ~
51400 \begin_inset space ~
51404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51406 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51411 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
51412 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51415 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51417 \begin_inset space ~
51420 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51422 \begin_inset space ~
51425 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51430 \begin_inset space ~
51434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51436 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51442 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51443 when it is first configured.
51444 The default output format is
51447 \begin_inset space ~
51455 \begin_layout Subsection
51456 View (Other Formats)
51459 \begin_layout Standard
51460 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
51461 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
51462 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
51463 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51464 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
51466 All possible formats are listed in section
51467 \begin_inset space ~
51471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51473 reference "subsec:Export"
51479 You should at least see the menu entry
51485 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51487 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
51489 \begin_inset space ~
51493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51495 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51501 \begin_inset Index idx
51506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51507 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51516 \begin_layout Standard
51517 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
51518 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51523 \begin_inset space ~
51526 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51528 \begin_inset space ~
51531 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51536 \begin_inset space ~
51540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51542 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51548 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51549 when it is first configured.
51552 \begin_layout Subsection
51554 \begin_inset space ~
51560 \begin_layout Standard
51561 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
51564 \begin_layout Subsection
51565 Update (Other Formats)
51568 \begin_layout Standard
51569 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
51572 \begin_layout Subsection
51573 View Master Document
51576 \begin_layout Standard
51577 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51593 \begin_inset space ~
51598 manual for more information on this topic).
51599 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
51601 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
51605 \begin_inset space ~
51609 \begin_inset space ~
51614 generates the output of the whole book,
51619 will just output the chapter alone.
51622 \begin_layout Standard
51623 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51626 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51627 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51629 \begin_inset space ~
51633 \begin_inset space ~
51640 \begin_inset space ~
51644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51646 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51651 ) or in the preferences (menu
51653 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51654 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51656 \begin_inset space ~
51659 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51661 \begin_inset space ~
51664 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51666 \begin_inset space ~
51670 \begin_inset space ~
51677 \begin_inset space ~
51681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51683 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51691 \begin_layout Subsection
51692 Update Master Document
51695 \begin_layout Standard
51696 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51712 \begin_inset space ~
51717 manual for more information on this topic).
51718 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51721 \begin_layout Standard
51722 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51724 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51725 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51726 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51728 \begin_inset space ~
51732 \begin_inset space ~
51739 \begin_inset space ~
51743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51745 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51750 ) or in the preferences (menu
51752 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51753 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51755 \begin_inset space ~
51758 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51760 \begin_inset space ~
51763 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51765 \begin_inset space ~
51769 \begin_inset space ~
51776 \begin_inset space ~
51780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51782 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51790 \begin_layout Subsection
51792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51794 name "subsec:Compressed"
51801 \begin_layout Standard
51802 Un/compresses the current document.
51803 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51805 Additional Features
51807 manual for details).
51810 \begin_layout Subsection
51814 \begin_layout Standard
51815 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51818 \begin_layout Subsection
51822 \begin_layout Standard
51823 The document settings are described in appendix
51824 \begin_inset space ~
51828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51830 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51838 \begin_layout Section
51840 \begin_inset Index idx
51845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51847 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51864 \begin_layout Subsection
51868 \begin_layout Standard
51869 Spell checking is explained in section
51870 \begin_inset space ~
51874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51876 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51884 \begin_layout Subsection
51888 \begin_layout Standard
51889 The thesaurus is described in section
51890 \begin_inset space ~
51894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51896 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51904 \begin_layout Subsection
51906 \begin_inset Index idx
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51918 \begin_inset Index idx
51923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51932 \begin_layout Standard
51933 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51936 \begin_layout Subsection
51942 \begin_inset Index idx
51947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51948 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51957 \begin_layout Standard
51958 Generates with the help of the program
51960 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51963 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51964 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51965 This feature is not available on Windows.
51968 \begin_layout Subsection
51974 \begin_inset Index idx
51979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51989 \begin_layout Standard
51990 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51995 \begin_inset space ~
52000 to see the full filename paths.
52003 \begin_layout Subsection
52005 \begin_inset Index idx
52010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52019 \begin_layout Standard
52020 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
52021 files as described in section
52022 \begin_inset space ~
52026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52028 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
52036 \begin_layout Subsection
52038 \begin_inset Index idx
52043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52046 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52056 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
52059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52060 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
52072 \begin_inset Index idx
52077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52078 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
52087 \begin_layout Standard
52088 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
52092 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52093 -packages and programs it needs;
52095 \begin_inset space ~
52099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52101 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
52109 \begin_layout Subsection
52113 \begin_layout Standard
52118 dialog as described in detail in appendix
52119 \begin_inset space ~
52123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52125 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52133 \begin_layout Section
52135 \begin_inset Index idx
52140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52159 \begin_layout Standard
52160 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
52161 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
52163 If a file is not available in this language,
52164 the English version will be listed.
52167 \begin_layout Standard
52171 \begin_inset space ~
52176 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
52177 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52178 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
52180 \begin_inset space ~
52184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52186 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
52194 \begin_layout Standard
52198 \begin_inset space ~
52203 gives information about the copyright,
52204 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
52205 version you are using.
52208 \begin_layout Section
52210 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52212 name "sec:Toolbars"
52219 \begin_layout Standard
52220 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
52221 \begin_inset space ~
52225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52227 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
52235 \begin_layout Standard
52236 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
52237 This is described in the
52239 Additional Features
52244 \begin_layout Subsection
52246 \begin_inset Index idx
52251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52253 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52270 \begin_layout Standard
52271 \begin_inset Graphics
52272 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
52280 \begin_layout Standard
52281 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52287 \begin_layout Standard
52288 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52304 \begin_inset Note Note
52307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52308 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
52313 manual for more information.
52321 \begin_layout Standard
52322 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52328 \begin_layout Standard
52329 \begin_inset Tabular
52330 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
52331 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52332 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52333 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52339 \begin_inset Graphics
52340 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
52350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52354 pull-down box for the environments
52367 \begin_layout Standard
52368 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
52374 \begin_layout Standard
52376 \begin_inset Tabular
52377 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
52378 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52379 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52380 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52404 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52434 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52464 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52471 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52480 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
52488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52501 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52510 arg "spelling-continuously"
52518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52522 Spellcheck continuously
52528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52581 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52588 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52611 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52618 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52641 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52673 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
52678 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52696 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
52704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52729 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52736 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52750 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52769 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52778 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52792 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52793 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52800 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52823 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52826 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52828 \begin_inset space ~
52831 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52839 arg "dialog-show character"
52850 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52871 Set text to noun style,
52873 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52878 \begin_inset space ~
52881 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52889 arg "dialog-show character"
52900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52906 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52909 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52922 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52925 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52932 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52938 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52943 arg "textstyle-apply"
52953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52958 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52959 Format text using the current settings in the
52961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52963 \begin_inset space ~
52966 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52977 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53001 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53003 \begin_inset space ~
53012 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53021 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
53029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53049 arg "tabular-insert"
53057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53063 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53076 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
53079 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
53087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53092 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
53095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53102 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53111 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
53119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53123 Toggle outline window on/off,
53126 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53133 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53142 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
53150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53154 Toggle math toolbar on/off
53160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53169 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
53177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53181 Toggle table toolbar on/off
53194 \begin_layout Subsection
53196 \begin_inset Index idx
53201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53203 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53220 \begin_layout Standard
53221 \begin_inset Graphics
53222 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
53230 \begin_layout Standard
53231 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53237 \begin_layout Standard
53238 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53241 \begin_layout Standard
53242 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53248 \begin_layout Standard
53249 \begin_inset Tabular
53250 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
53251 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53252 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53253 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53290 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
53298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53317 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
53325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53335 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53344 arg "layout-toggle List"
53352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53371 arg "layout-toggle Description"
53379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53398 arg "depth-increment"
53406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53414 \begin_inset space ~
53418 \begin_inset space ~
53427 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53436 arg "depth-decrement"
53444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53450 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53452 \begin_inset space ~
53456 \begin_inset space ~
53465 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53474 arg "float-insert figure"
53482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53489 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53496 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53505 arg "float-insert table"
53513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53520 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53566 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
53574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53580 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53596 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
53604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53642 \begin_inset space ~
53651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53660 arg "nomencl-insert"
53668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53676 \begin_inset space ~
53685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53694 arg "footnote-insert"
53702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53724 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53738 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53740 \begin_inset space ~
53749 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53772 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53773 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53775 \begin_inset space ~
53784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53793 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53844 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53869 \begin_inset space ~
53878 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53887 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53901 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53902 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53918 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53932 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53933 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53935 \begin_inset space ~
53944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53953 arg "dialog-show character"
53961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53967 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53969 \begin_inset space ~
53972 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53979 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53985 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53990 arg "textstyle-apply"
53998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54003 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
54004 Format text using the recent settings in the
54007 arg "dialog-show character"
54016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54025 arg "layout-paragraph"
54033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54039 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
54041 \begin_inset space ~
54050 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54059 arg "thesaurus-entry"
54067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54073 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54087 \begin_layout Subsection
54088 View/Update Toolbar
54089 \begin_inset Index idx
54094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54113 \begin_layout Standard
54114 \begin_inset Graphics
54115 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
54122 \begin_layout Standard
54123 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
54129 \begin_layout Standard
54130 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
54133 \begin_layout Standard
54134 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
54140 \begin_layout Standard
54141 \begin_inset Tabular
54142 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
54143 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
54144 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
54145 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
54146 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54185 arg "buffer-update"
54193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54215 arg "master-buffer-view"
54223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54231 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
54233 \begin_inset space ~
54239 \begin_inset space ~
54248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54257 arg "master-buffer-update"
54265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54273 \begin_inset space ~
54277 \begin_inset space ~
54286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54295 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
54303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54310 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
54312 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
54314 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
54317 \SpecialChar menuseparator
54318 Synchronize with Output
54324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54335 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
54345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54352 View (Other Formats)
54358 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54365 arg "update-others"
54369 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
54377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54383 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54384 Update (Other Formats)
54397 \begin_layout Standard
54399 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
54400 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
54405 \begin_layout Subsection
54409 \begin_layout Standard
54410 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
54411 \begin_inset space ~
54415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54417 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54424 \begin_inset Index idx
54429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54431 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54448 \begin_inset space ~
54453 manual and the math macro toolbar
54454 \begin_inset Index idx
54459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54461 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54482 \begin_layout Chapter
54483 The Document Settings
54484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54486 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
54491 \begin_inset Index idx
54496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54498 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54515 \begin_layout Standard
54519 \begin_inset space ~
54524 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
54526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54530 You can save your document settings as default with the
54532 Save as Document Defaults
54534 button in any dialog.
54535 This will create a template named
54539 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
54540 when you create a new document without using a template.
54543 \begin_layout Standard
54548 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
54549 This affects mostly class options,
54550 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
54553 \begin_layout Standard
54554 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
54555 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
54556 To find a setting quicker,
54557 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
54559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54563 \begin_inset space \space{}
54567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54575 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
54576 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
54577 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
54580 \begin_layout Section
54584 \begin_layout Standard
54585 Here you set the document class,
54588 and a master document.
54589 Document classes are described in section
54590 \begin_inset space ~
54594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54596 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
54604 \begin_layout Standard
54608 \begin_inset space ~
54613 you can load you own layout-file,
54614 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
54619 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
54620 as a layout for a document class.
54621 For more about layout-files,
54624 Installing New Document Classes,
54625 Types of Layout Files
54634 \begin_layout Standard
54635 Some classes use special class options by default.
54636 If this is the case,
54637 they are listed in the field
54641 and you can decide to use them or not.
54642 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
54643 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
54648 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54650 color and page layout packages.
54656 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54658 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
54662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54663 When you want to use one of the following drivers
54664 \begin_inset Newline newline
54678 \begin_inset Newline newline
54681 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54688 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54690 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
54703 \begin_layout Standard
54708 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
54709 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
54710 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
54711 This way child documents are always compilable.
54712 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54719 \begin_inset space ~
54727 \begin_layout Standard
54728 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54738 \begin_inset Index idx
54743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54746 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54761 \begin_inset Index idx
54766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54769 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54783 for cross-references,
54785 \begin_inset space ~
54789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54791 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54799 \begin_layout Section
54803 \begin_layout Standard
54804 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54805 Please refer to the section
54808 \begin_inset space ~
54816 \begin_inset space ~
54821 manual for details.
54824 \begin_layout Section
54828 \begin_layout Standard
54829 Modules are explained in section
54830 \begin_inset space ~
54834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54836 reference "subsec:Modules"
54844 \begin_layout Section
54848 \begin_layout Standard
54850 \begin_inset space ~
54854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54856 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54864 \begin_layout Section
54868 \begin_layout Standard
54869 The document font settings are described in section
54870 \begin_inset space ~
54874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54876 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54884 \begin_layout Section
54888 \begin_layout Standard
54889 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54901 \begin_inset space ~
54906 and whether it should be a
54909 \begin_inset space ~
54914 can also be specified here.
54917 \begin_layout Standard
54918 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54919 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54920 That would be impractical,
54922 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54924 it will be as you specified in the output.
54927 \begin_layout Standard
54930 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54933 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54934 justifies the text on screen.
54935 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54937 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54941 \begin_layout Standard
54943 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54952 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54957 \begin_layout Section
54961 \begin_layout Standard
54962 This dialog is described in sections
54963 \begin_inset space ~
54967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54969 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54977 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54985 \begin_layout Section
54989 \begin_layout Standard
54990 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54991 \begin_inset space ~
54995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54997 reference "subsec:Margins"
55005 \begin_layout Section
55007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55009 name "sec:Language-encodings"
55014 \begin_inset Index idx
55019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55021 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55038 \begin_layout Standard
55039 The document language and quote styles are set here.
55040 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
55041 (the \SpecialChar LyX
55042 file is always encoded in utf8).
55043 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
55044 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
55045 -command is not known for a particular character).
55046 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
55050 \begin_layout Standard
55052 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
55055 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
55056 files in Unicode – or utf8,
55057 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
55058 's default encoding).
55059 This should normally fit your needs,
55060 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
55061 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
55062 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
55063 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
55065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55073 encodings is necessary.
55076 \begin_layout Standard
55078 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
55080 provides support for these traditional encodings.
55083 Traditional (auto-selected)
55091 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
55093 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
55097 \begin_layout Standard
55099 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
55100 If you use the option
55106 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
55109 If the document contains text in more than one language you
55110 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
55113 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55116 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
55117 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
55118 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
55123 \begin_layout Standard
55125 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
55134 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
55136 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
55140 \begin_layout Standard
55142 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
55144 you can also select
55149 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
55150 Note that this encoding is then used for
55155 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
55158 \begin_layout Standard
55160 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55162 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
55166 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
55167 Do not load inputenc
55168 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55172 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
55174 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
55176 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55178 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
55179 in the next dropdown menu
55180 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55181 does what it states:
55183 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
55185 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
55187 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
55188 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
55189 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55195 \begin_inset Index idx
55200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55202 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
55207 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55212 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
55226 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
55228 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55230 Note that this option is only available for the standard
55236 Traditional (auto-selected)
55243 \begin_layout Standard
55245 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
55247 also supports Unicode output,
55248 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
55250 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
55251 installation supports Unicode),
55252 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
55253 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
55254 is quite incomplete,
55255 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
55259 (when \SpecialChar LyX
55260 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
55262 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
55263 -commands is not used,
55264 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
55265 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55266 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55268 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
55270 Both engines support Unicode natively.
55272 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
55275 \begin_inset space ~
55284 \begin_inset space ~
55292 \begin_inset space ~
55299 \begin_inset space ~
55303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55305 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
55311 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
55316 you might try out one of these new engines.
55321 \begin_layout Standard
55325 \begin_inset space ~
55330 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55331 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
55332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55340 The possible settings are:
55343 \begin_layout Description
55344 Default uses the language package that is selected in
55346 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
55347 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
55351 \begin_inset space ~
55355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55357 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
55365 \begin_layout Description
55366 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
55367 In many cases this will be
55372 \begin_inset Index idx
55377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55380 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55395 If the newer package
55400 \begin_inset Index idx
55405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55408 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55422 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55423 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55424 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
55426 this package will be used instead of
55433 \begin_layout Description
55435 \begin_inset space ~
55446 would be more appropriate.
55449 \begin_layout Description
55450 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
55451 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
55455 (for German texts),
55459 \begin_inset Newline newline
55464 usepackage{ngerman}
55467 \begin_layout Description
55468 None will not use a language package.
55469 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
55472 \begin_layout Standard
55473 Here is a list with the important encodings:
55476 \begin_layout Description
55478 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
55480 \begin_inset space ~
55484 \begin_inset space ~
55488 \begin_inset space ~
55496 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55502 \begin_inset Index idx
55507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55510 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55526 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55532 \begin_layout Description
55533 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
55534 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
55536 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
55538 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
55539 -commands are needed.
55541 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
55542 This is the same as the
55555 \begin_layout Description
55557 \begin_inset space ~
55561 \begin_inset space ~
55564 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
55567 \begin_layout Description
55569 \begin_inset space ~
55573 \begin_inset space ~
55576 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
55579 \begin_layout Description
55581 \begin_inset space ~
55584 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
55587 \begin_layout Description
55589 \begin_inset space ~
55593 \begin_inset space ~
55596 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
55597 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55598 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55601 \begin_layout Description
55603 \begin_inset space ~
55607 \begin_inset space ~
55610 8859-13) for Estonian,
55611 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55612 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
55615 \begin_layout Description
55617 \begin_inset space ~
55621 \begin_inset space ~
55624 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
55625 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55626 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55629 \begin_layout Description
55631 \begin_inset space ~
55635 \begin_inset space ~
55639 \begin_inset space ~
55642 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
55643 \begin_inset space ~
55649 \begin_layout Description
55651 \begin_inset space ~
55655 \begin_inset space ~
55659 \begin_inset space ~
55662 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
55669 Slovak and Slovenian
55672 \begin_layout Description
55674 \begin_inset space ~
55678 \begin_inset space ~
55681 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
55682 used especially on UNIX OSes,
55683 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55684 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55685 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55686 \begin_inset space ~
55690 \begin_inset space ~
55696 \begin_layout Description
55698 \begin_inset space ~
55702 \begin_inset space ~
55705 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
55706 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
55707 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55708 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55709 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55710 \begin_inset space ~
55714 \begin_inset space ~
55720 \begin_layout Description
55722 \begin_inset space ~
55726 \begin_inset space ~
55729 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55732 \begin_layout Description
55734 \begin_inset space ~
55738 \begin_inset space ~
55741 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55744 \begin_layout Description
55746 \begin_inset space ~
55750 \begin_inset space ~
55753 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55756 Serbian and Ukrainian
55759 \begin_layout Description
55761 \begin_inset space ~
55764 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55767 \begin_layout Description
55769 \begin_inset space ~
55772 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55775 \begin_layout Description
55777 \begin_inset space ~
55781 \begin_inset space ~
55784 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55787 \begin_layout Description
55789 \begin_inset space ~
55793 \begin_inset space ~
55799 \begin_layout Description
55801 \begin_inset space ~
55805 \begin_inset space ~
55808 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55809 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55812 \begin_layout Description
55814 \begin_inset space ~
55818 \begin_inset space ~
55824 \begin_layout Description
55826 \begin_inset space ~
55830 \begin_inset space ~
55833 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55834 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55840 \begin_inset Index idx
55845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55864 set the document language to
55869 \begin_layout Description
55871 \begin_inset space ~
55875 \begin_inset space ~
55878 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55879 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55886 set the document language to
55889 \begin_inset space ~
55895 \begin_layout Description
55897 \begin_inset space ~
55901 \begin_inset space ~
55904 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55905 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55911 \begin_inset Index idx
55916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55919 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55935 set the document language to
55940 \begin_layout Description
55942 \begin_inset space ~
55946 \begin_inset space ~
55949 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55950 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55957 set the document language to
55962 \begin_layout Description
55964 \begin_inset space ~
55968 \begin_inset space ~
55971 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55972 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55979 set the document language to
55984 \begin_layout Description
55986 \begin_inset space ~
55989 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55992 \begin_layout Description
55994 \begin_inset space ~
55998 \begin_inset space ~
56002 \begin_inset space ~
56005 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
56007 Maltese and Turkish
56010 \begin_layout Description
56012 \begin_inset space ~
56016 \begin_inset space ~
56020 \begin_inset space ~
56023 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
56032 Romanian and Slovenian,
56033 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
56036 \begin_layout Description
56038 \begin_inset space ~
56042 \begin_inset space ~
56048 \begin_layout Description
56050 \begin_inset space ~
56054 \begin_inset space ~
56057 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
56058 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
56061 \begin_layout Description
56063 \begin_inset space ~
56067 \begin_inset space ~
56070 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56076 \begin_inset Index idx
56081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56098 (for the languages Chinese,
56099 Japanese and Korean)
56100 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
56102 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
56103 with the default encoding (
56105 Unicode (utf8) [default]
56111 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
56112 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56117 \begin_layout Description
56119 \begin_inset space ~
56127 \begin_inset space ~
56130 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
56137 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56141 which use Unicode directly,
56142 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56149 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
56150 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
56152 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56155 \begin_layout Description
56157 \begin_inset space ~
56161 \begin_inset space ~
56164 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56170 \begin_inset Index idx
56175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56178 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56193 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
56199 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
56201 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
56202 This used to be more comprehensive than
56205 \begin_inset space ~
56211 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
56216 \begin_layout Description
56218 \begin_inset space ~
56221 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56227 \begin_inset Index idx
56232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56235 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56251 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
56252 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
56253 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
56254 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
56255 with the default encoding (
56257 Unicode (utf8) [default]
56263 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
56264 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
56269 \begin_layout Description
56271 \begin_inset space ~
56275 \begin_inset space ~
56279 \begin_inset space ~
56282 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
56283 \begin_inset space ~
56289 \begin_layout Description
56291 \begin_inset space ~
56295 \begin_inset space ~
56299 \begin_inset space ~
56302 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
56317 Spanish and Swedish;
56318 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
56321 \begin_layout Description
56323 \begin_inset space ~
56327 \begin_inset space ~
56331 \begin_inset space ~
56334 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
56335 but with the Euro currency sign,
56336 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
56339 \begin_layout Section
56341 \begin_inset Index idx
56346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56348 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56363 \begin_inset Index idx
56368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56370 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56385 \begin_inset Index idx
56390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56392 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56407 \begin_inset Index idx
56412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56414 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56431 \begin_layout Standard
56432 Here you can alter the font color for the
56441 \begin_inset space ~
56447 light grey)for the background color for the
56455 \begin_inset space ~
56466 sets the color back to the default.
56469 \begin_layout Standard
56470 Clicking any button showing
56478 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
56479 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
56482 \begin_layout Standard
56487 \begin_inset space ~
56492 font color and use the option
56495 \begin_inset space ~
56500 in the document settings under
56503 \begin_inset space ~
56509 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
56510 \begin_inset space ~
56514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56516 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56524 \begin_layout Standard
56525 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
56531 \begin_layout Standard
56535 \begin_inset space ~
56544 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
56546 \begin_inset space ~
56549 Code after a forced page break:
56552 \begin_layout Itemize
56553 For the page color:
56554 \begin_inset Newline newline
56561 pagecolor{color name}
56564 \begin_layout Itemize
56565 For the text color:
56566 \begin_inset Newline newline
56576 \begin_layout Standard
56577 You are restricted to one of
56619 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
56626 \begin_inset space ~
56632 \begin_inset Newline newline
56635 If you have changed a text or background color,
56636 you can use the following names to refer to them:
56639 \begin_layout Itemize
56645 \begin_inset Newline newline
56650 page_backgroundcolor
56653 \begin_layout Itemize
56657 \begin_inset space ~
56663 \begin_inset Newline newline
56671 \begin_layout Itemize
56675 \begin_inset space ~
56681 \begin_inset Newline newline
56689 \begin_layout Itemize
56693 \begin_inset space ~
56699 \begin_inset Newline newline
56707 \begin_layout Standard
56708 To see how to define and use custom colors,
56712 \begin_inset space ~
56720 \begin_inset space ~
56728 \begin_layout Section
56730 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56734 \begin_layout Standard
56736 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56737 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56738 \begin_inset space ~
56742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56744 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56753 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56754 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56757 \begin_layout Standard
56759 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56762 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56765 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56767 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56768 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56769 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56772 \begin_layout Section
56776 \begin_layout Standard
56777 Here you can adjust the
56781 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56785 as described in section
56786 \begin_inset space ~
56790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56792 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56798 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56802 \begin_layout Standard
56804 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56805 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56806 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56807 The most common one are:
56810 \begin_layout Description
56812 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56813 right Line numbers to the right margin
56816 \begin_layout Description
56818 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56819 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56823 \begin_layout Description
56825 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56826 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56829 \begin_layout Description
56831 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56832 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56835 \begin_layout Description
56837 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56838 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56841 \begin_layout Description
56843 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56845 \begin_inset space ~
56848 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56853 \begin_layout Section
56857 \begin_layout Standard
56858 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56864 \begin_inset Index idx
56869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56872 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56892 \begin_inset Index idx
56897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56900 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56919 \begin_inset Index idx
56924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56927 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56942 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56946 Sectioned bibliography
56948 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56954 \begin_inset Index idx
56959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56982 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56984 you can select a document-specific
56988 for the generation of the bibliography.
56989 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56990 \begin_inset space ~
56994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56996 reference "sec:Bibliography"
57004 \begin_layout Section
57008 \begin_layout Standard
57009 Here you can define the
57013 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
57014 \begin_inset space ~
57018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57020 reference "sec:Index"
57028 \begin_layout Section
57032 \begin_layout Standard
57033 The PDF properties are explained in section
57034 \begin_inset space ~
57038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57040 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
57048 \begin_layout Section
57052 \begin_layout Standard
57053 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
57054 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57060 \begin_inset Index idx
57065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57068 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57088 \begin_inset Index idx
57093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57116 \begin_inset Index idx
57121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57124 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57144 \begin_inset Index idx
57149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57152 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57172 \begin_inset Index idx
57177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57180 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57200 \begin_inset Index idx
57205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57208 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57228 \begin_inset Index idx
57233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57256 \begin_inset Index idx
57261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57284 \begin_inset Index idx
57289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57311 \begin_inset Index idx
57316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57319 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57334 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
57337 \begin_layout Description
57338 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
57339 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57340 -errors in formulas,
57341 ensure that you have this enabled.
57344 \begin_layout Description
57345 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
57346 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57347 -errors in formulas,
57348 ensure that you have this enabled.
57351 \begin_layout Description
57352 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
57356 \begin_inset space ~
57368 \begin_layout Description
57369 esint is used for special integral characters,
57373 \begin_inset space ~
57385 \begin_layout Description
57386 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
57398 \begin_layout Description
57399 mathtools is used for the math commands
57440 and labeled arrows,
57441 see the corresponding sections in the
57448 \begin_layout Description
57449 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
57452 Chemical Symbols and Equations
57461 \begin_layout Description
57462 stackrel is used for the math command
57480 \begin_layout Description
57481 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
57484 \begin_layout Description
57485 undertilde is used for the math command
57494 Accents for one Character
57503 \begin_layout Section
57505 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
57507 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
57513 \begin_layout Standard
57515 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
57516 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
57519 \begin_layout Standard
57521 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
57522 The float placement options
57523 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
57526 are described in the section
57529 \begin_inset space ~
57533 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
57535 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
57543 \begin_inset space ~
57551 \begin_layout Section
57555 \begin_layout Standard
57556 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
57558 Program Code Listings
57563 \begin_inset space ~
57571 \begin_layout Section
57575 \begin_layout Standard
57576 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
57585 set to be used and set the
57590 The itemize environment is described in section
57591 \begin_inset space ~
57595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57597 reference "sec:Itemize"
57605 \begin_layout Standard
57606 You can furthermore specify a
57609 \begin_inset space ~
57614 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57615 command of the desired character.
57616 For example to use the € sign,
57617 you have to insert the command
57624 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
57626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57630 \begin_inset space \space{}
57634 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
57644 To find the command for a math symbol,
57645 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
57648 \begin_layout Standard
57649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57658 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57659 -packages in the preamble (menu
57661 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57662 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57665 \begin_inset space ~
57671 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
57675 usepackage{textcomp}
57678 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
57682 usepackage{amssymb}
57692 \begin_layout Section
57696 \begin_layout Standard
57697 Branches are described in section
57698 \begin_inset space ~
57702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57704 reference "sec:Branches"
57712 \begin_layout Section
57714 \change_deleted 5863208 1685691759
57716 \change_inserted 5863208 1685691762
57720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57722 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57729 \begin_layout Standard
57730 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57733 \begin_layout Description
57735 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57737 \begin_inset space ~
57742 Save transient properties
57744 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57745 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57749 \begin_layout Itemize
57751 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57752 the activation of change tracking
57755 \begin_layout Itemize
57757 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57758 the output of tracked changes
57761 \begin_layout Itemize
57763 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57764 the recording of the document directory path.
57767 \begin_layout Standard
57769 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57770 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57774 \begin_layout Description
57776 \begin_inset space ~
57780 \begin_inset space ~
57784 The format that is used when you enter
57785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57806 View Master Document
57807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57814 Update Master Document
57815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57822 menu or the toolbar.
57823 The default is set in
57825 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57826 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57828 \begin_inset space ~
57831 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57836 \begin_inset space ~
57840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57842 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57850 \begin_layout Description
57852 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692088
57854 \begin_inset space ~
57858 \begin_inset space ~
57862 \begin_inset space ~
57865 programs If this is switched on,
57871 option which is needed with some packages.
57872 Note that this comes with security risks,
57873 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57874 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57878 \begin_layout Description
57880 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57882 \begin_inset space ~
57886 \begin_inset space ~
57889 Options offers settings for the
57897 \begin_layout Itemize
57901 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57903 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57905 \begin_inset space ~
57911 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57913 \begin_inset space ~
57917 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57923 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57925 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57926 settings for the menu
57928 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57932 \begin_inset space ~
57936 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57939 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57940 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57945 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57947 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57949 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57952 or a detailed description see section
57954 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57959 \begin_inset space ~
57965 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57969 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57973 \begin_layout Itemize
57975 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57978 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57980 determines whether so-called
57981 \begin_inset Quotes els
57985 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57989 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57990 \begin_inset Quotes els
57994 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57997 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57998 (such as sections or captions),
57999 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
58001 This setting is on by default,
58002 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
58004 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
58005 you can uncheck this.
58006 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
58008 just leave it checked.
58014 \begin_layout Description
58016 \begin_inset space ~
58020 \begin_inset space ~
58023 Options offers settings for the export format
58031 \begin_inset space ~
58036 will assure that the output follows exactly version
58037 \begin_inset space ~
58040 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
58044 \begin_inset space ~
58049 settings are described in detail in section
58051 Math Output in XHTML
58056 \begin_inset space ~
58065 \begin_inset space ~
58069 \begin_inset space ~
58074 is used for the size of equations in the output.
58075 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692496
58079 \begin_layout Description
58081 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692661
58083 \begin_inset space ~
58087 \begin_inset space ~
58090 Options offers settings for the export format
58093 The details for the options are described in the chapter
58099 Additional Features
58106 \begin_layout Description
58108 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58110 \begin_inset space ~
58115 Save transient properties
58117 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
58118 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
58122 \begin_layout Itemize
58124 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58125 the activation of change tracking
58128 \begin_layout Itemize
58130 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58131 the output of tracked changes
58134 \begin_layout Itemize
58136 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58137 the recording of the document directory path.
58140 \begin_layout Standard
58142 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
58143 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
58146 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
58151 \begin_layout Description
58153 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
58155 \begin_inset space ~
58159 \begin_inset space ~
58163 \begin_inset space ~
58166 programs If this is switched on,
58172 option which is needed with some packages.
58173 Note that this comes with security risks,
58174 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
58179 \begin_layout Section
58187 \begin_layout Standard
58188 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
58189 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
58191 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
58193 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
58196 \begin_layout Standard
58197 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
58198 -syntax is given in section
58199 \begin_inset space ~
58203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58205 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
58213 \begin_layout Chapter
58219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58221 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
58226 \begin_inset Index idx
58231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58240 \begin_layout Standard
58241 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
58243 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
58247 It has the following submenus.
58250 \begin_layout Section
58254 \begin_layout Subsection
58258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58259 User Interface File
58260 \begin_inset Index idx
58265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58282 \begin_inset Index idx
58287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58289 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58306 \begin_layout Standard
58307 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
58308 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
58316 \begin_layout Description
58321 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
58324 \begin_layout Description
58331 the menu entries in popup context menus
58334 \begin_layout Description
58339 specifies the toolbar buttons
58342 \begin_layout Standard
58343 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
58344 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
58347 \begin_layout Standard
58348 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
58362 entries must be finished with an explicit
58392 and in the case of the
58393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58405 The syntax for the entries is:
58408 \begin_layout Standard
58409 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58438 \begin_layout Standard
58440 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58443 All the \SpecialChar LyX
58444 -functions are listed in the menu
58446 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
58448 \begin_inset space ~
58456 \begin_layout Standard
58457 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58463 \begin_layout Standard
58465 assuming you use the menu
58467 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58470 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
58471 you can add the line
58474 \begin_layout Standard
58475 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58499 \begin_layout Standard
58501 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58516 to have the sixth bookmark.
58519 \begin_layout Standard
58523 \begin_inset space ~
58528 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
58529 's toolbar buttons.
58530 The currently available icon sets are compared in
58531 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58534 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
58540 \change_inserted 258250489 1697053558
58544 \begin_layout Standard
58546 \change_inserted 258250489 1697054388
58550 \begin_inset space ~
58554 \begin_inset space ~
58559 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
58560 's user interface control elements.
58561 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
58562 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
58563 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
58564 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
58569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58573 \begin_layout Standard
58576 Enable tool tips in main work area
58578 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
58581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58585 \begin_layout Standard
58590 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
58591 should display in the menu
58593 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58595 \begin_inset space ~
58601 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58605 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58607 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58611 \begin_layout Standard
58613 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58614 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58619 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58620 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58621 the text then appears centered.
58626 \begin_layout Subsection
58630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58634 \begin_layout Standard
58637 Restore window layouts and geometries
58640 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58644 \begin_layout Standard
58647 Restore cursor positions
58649 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
58652 \begin_layout Standard
58655 Load opened files from last session
58657 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58661 \begin_layout Standard
58664 Clear all session information
58666 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
58667 sessions (cursor positions,
58668 names of last opened documents,
58672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58674 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58676 name "subsec:Backup documents"
58681 \begin_inset Index idx
58686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58688 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58705 \begin_layout Standard
58708 Backup original documents when saving
58710 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
58711 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
58712 opened or when it was
58714 saved the last time.
58715 It is stored in the
58718 \begin_inset space ~
58724 \begin_inset space ~
58728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58730 reference "sec:Paths"
58735 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
58738 \begin_inset space ~
58744 The backup file has the file extension
58745 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
58749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58755 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
58759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58763 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
58764 and the same name than the original file.
58768 \begin_inset space ~
58774 the file has the full path in its file name,
58776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58785 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58791 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
58794 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
58800 \begin_layout Standard
58802 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
58805 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
58808 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
58809 These files which are stored as
58813 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
58814 Should \SpecialChar LyX
58815 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
58816 this file can be used as a resort.
58819 \begin_layout Standard
58821 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
58822 Please read section
58823 \begin_inset space ~
58827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58829 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
58833 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
58834 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
58839 \begin_layout Standard
58841 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
58848 you can specify the time between backup saves.
58853 \begin_layout Standard
58856 Save documents compressed by default
58858 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
58859 \begin_inset space ~
58863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58865 reference "subsec:Compressed"
58871 This applies to newly created documents only.
58872 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
58873 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
58877 \begin_layout Standard
58879 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
58882 Save the document directory path
58884 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
58886 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
58887 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58892 \begin_layout Standard
58894 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58895 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58896 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58897 The temporary file name is
58906 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58907 Windows & work area
58910 \begin_layout Standard
58913 Open documents in tabs
58916 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58920 \begin_layout Standard
58925 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58932 \begin_inset space ~
58936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58938 reference "sec:Paths"
58943 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58952 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58954 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58955 instance is created for each file.
58958 \begin_layout Standard
58961 Single close-tab button
58964 there will only be one close button (
58974 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58975 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58976 Regardless of this option,
58977 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
58980 \begin_layout Standard
58981 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58990 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
58991 before the change takes effect.
58999 \begin_layout Standard
59004 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
59005 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
59007 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
59011 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
59012 and only want to close the view in once instance.
59015 \begin_layout Subsection
59017 \begin_inset Index idx
59022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59041 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
59048 \begin_layout Standard
59049 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
59053 \begin_layout Standard
59054 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59063 This section only deals with the fonts
59067 the \SpecialChar LyX
59069 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
59070 and set in the menu
59072 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
59073 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
59084 \begin_layout Standard
59104 (depends on the system) as its
59107 \begin_inset space ~
59123 \begin_layout Standard
59124 You can change the font size with the
59131 \begin_layout Standard
59136 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
59138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59141 points have the size of 1
59142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59147 \begin_inset space ~
59151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59153 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
59159 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
59160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59164 The sizes are explained in detail in section
59165 \begin_inset space ~
59169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59171 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
59179 \begin_layout Subsection
59181 \begin_inset Index idx
59186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59188 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59204 \begin_inset Index idx
59209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59211 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59228 \begin_layout Standard
59229 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
59230 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
59237 \begin_layout Standard
59238 By checking the option
59242 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
59250 \begin_inset space ~
59254 \begin_inset space ~
59259 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
59262 \begin_layout Subsection
59264 \begin_inset Index idx
59269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59271 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59288 \begin_layout Standard
59289 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
59293 \begin_layout Standard
59298 enables previewing snippets of your document.
59299 This feature is described in section
59300 \begin_inset space ~
59304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59306 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
59314 \begin_layout Standard
59315 Checking the option
59318 \begin_inset space ~
59322 \begin_inset space ~
59326 \begin_inset space ~
59331 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
59334 \begin_layout Section
59336 \begin_inset Index idx
59341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59360 \begin_layout Subsection
59364 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59368 \begin_layout Standard
59371 Cursor follows scrollbar
59373 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
59376 \begin_layout Standard
59377 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
59378 If you set the value to zero,
59379 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
59382 \begin_layout Standard
59385 Scroll below end of document
59387 is self-explanatory.
59390 \begin_layout Standard
59391 In \SpecialChar LyX
59392 one can jump from word to word by pressing
59399 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
59401 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
59402 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
59403 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
59407 \begin_layout Standard
59409 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
59412 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
59414 is only relevant in documents that
59420 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
59428 markup) with this option selected.
59429 It the option is not selected,
59430 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
59431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59436 \begin_inset Quotes els
59440 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59444 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
59445 dissolving from insets.
59456 \begin_inset Quotes els
59460 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59463 notwithstanding the state of this option.
59468 \begin_layout Standard
59471 Sort environments alphabetically
59473 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59476 \begin_layout Standard
59479 Group environments by their category
59481 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59484 \begin_layout Standard
59489 options determine the editing style for math macros,
59499 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
59503 \begin_layout Standard
59505 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59508 Search drive for cited files
59510 allows \SpecialChar LyX
59511 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
59514 \begin_inset space ~
59518 \begin_inset space ~
59522 \begin_inset space ~
59526 \begin_inset space ~
59529 Content\SpecialChar ldots
59532 context menu on a citation.
59536 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
59538 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59541 field determines the search pattern.
59543 \begin_inset space ~
59547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59549 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
59559 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59561 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59565 \begin_layout Standard
59567 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59568 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
59573 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
59574 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
59575 the text then appears centered.
59580 \begin_layout Subsection
59582 \begin_inset Index idx
59587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59594 \begin_inset Index idx
59599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59601 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59618 \begin_layout Standard
59623 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
59625 Several binding files are available,
59629 \begin_layout Description
59630 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
59633 \begin_layout Description
59634 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
59645 \begin_layout Description
59646 mac.bind a set of bindings for
59649 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59657 \begin_layout Standard
59658 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
59664 and binding files for special languages.
59665 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
59667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59671 \begin_inset space \space{}
59675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59683 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
59684 in a certain language,
59686 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
59689 \begin_layout Standard
59690 Some binding files,
59696 only have a limited scope.
59697 When looking at the end of the file
59702 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
59705 \begin_layout Standard
59709 \begin_inset space ~
59713 \begin_inset space ~
59718 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
59721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59725 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
59730 \begin_inset Index idx
59735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59737 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59754 \begin_layout Standard
59755 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
59756 functions and the bound shortcuts.
59757 To find functions easily,
59758 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
59760 Show key-bindings containing
59763 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
59764 Insert there for example as keyword
59765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59772 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
59773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59782 one function can have more than one shortcut.
59783 All \SpecialChar LyX
59784 functions are also listed in the file
59789 that you will find in the
59796 \begin_layout Standard
59798 to add the shortcut
59807 select the function and press the
59812 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
59813 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
59816 \begin_layout Standard
59817 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
59818 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
59819 Function definition with “
59822 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
59824 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
59829 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
59831 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
59834 \begin_layout Standard
59835 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
59839 \begin_layout Standard
59840 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
59841 The syntax of the entries is:
59844 \begin_layout Standard
59850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59869 \begin_layout Standard
59872 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
59873 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
59874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59907 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59908 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59909 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59910 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59915 you needed to specify it as
59920 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59921 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59923 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59926 \begin_layout Subsection
59928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59930 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59935 \begin_inset Index idx
59940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59947 \begin_inset Index idx
59952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59954 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59971 \begin_layout Standard
59972 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59973 For the case where this is not possible,
59975 provides keyboard maps.
59978 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
59982 \begin_inset space ~
59986 \begin_inset space ~
59991 and select the keyboard map file named
59998 \begin_layout Standard
60013 you can select the first and second with
60016 arg "keymap-primary"
60022 arg "keymap-secondary"
60025 respectively or toggle between them with
60028 arg "keymap-toggle"
60034 \begin_layout Standard
60035 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
60038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60044 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
60052 \begin_layout Standard
60053 You can also specify the mouse
60055 Wheel scrolling speed
60058 The standard value is 1.0;
60059 higher values speed up the scrolling,
60060 lower ones slow it down.
60063 Middle mouse button pasting
60065 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
60068 \begin_layout Standard
60076 \begin_inset space ~
60080 \begin_inset space ~
60086 you can select a key for zooming.
60087 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
60088 the text is zoomed.
60091 \begin_layout Subsection
60095 \begin_layout Standard
60096 Input completion is described in section
60097 \begin_inset space ~
60101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60103 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
60111 \begin_layout Section
60113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60120 \begin_inset Index idx
60125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60132 \begin_inset Index idx
60137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60156 \begin_layout Standard
60157 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
60158 are normally determined during the installation.
60159 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
60162 \begin_layout Description
60164 \begin_inset space ~
60167 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
60168 's working directory.
60169 It is the default when you
60181 \begin_inset space ~
60189 \begin_layout Description
60191 \begin_inset space ~
60194 templates This directory
60195 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
60196 contains the templates that are shown
60197 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
60198 will be opened when you use the menu
60199 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
60204 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60206 \begin_inset space ~
60210 \begin_inset space ~
60218 \begin_layout Description
60220 \begin_inset space ~
60223 files This directory
60224 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
60225 will be opened when you use the
60226 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
60227 contains the example files that are listed in
60230 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
60239 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60241 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
60243 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
60249 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
60251 \begin_inset Newline newline
60255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
60258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60268 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
60269 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
60279 \begin_layout Description
60281 \begin_inset space ~
60285 \begin_inset Index idx
60290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60306 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
60307 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
60308 \begin_inset space ~
60312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60314 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60324 will be used to save the backups.
60325 \begin_inset Newline newline
60328 Backup files have the ending
60329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60339 \begin_layout Description
60341 \begin_inset space ~
60344 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
60345 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
60347 \begin_inset Newline newline
60355 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
60361 You can edit this file with the program
60370 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
60371 in its preferences under
60374 \begin_inset space ~
60380 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
60385 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
60387 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
60394 and \SpecialChar LyX
60395 need to be running the same time.
60396 \begin_inset Newline newline
60399 The pipe is also used for the
60405 \begin_inset space ~
60409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60411 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60417 \begin_inset Newline newline
60420 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
60421 Server-Pipe on Windows,
60422 you must use this pipe name:
60423 \begin_inset Newline newline
60439 \begin_layout Description
60441 \begin_inset space ~
60444 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
60447 \begin_layout Description
60449 \begin_inset space ~
60452 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
60453 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60456 \begin_layout Description
60458 \begin_inset space ~
60461 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
60466 You only need to specify it if you are using
60470 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60471 For \SpecialChar LyX
60476 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
60479 \begin_layout Description
60481 \begin_inset space ~
60484 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
60485 When \SpecialChar LyX
60486 needs to use an external program,
60487 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
60488 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
60490 so you normally don't have to modify it.
60492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60500 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
60503 \begin_layout Description
60505 \begin_inset space ~
60508 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
60509 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
60510 code or in the document preamble.
60511 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
60512 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
60513 If files are included,
60514 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
60515 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
60517 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
60518 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
60521 \begin_layout Section
60525 \begin_layout Standard
60526 Here you can insert your
60535 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
60536 as described in section
60537 \begin_inset space ~
60541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60543 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
60549 to mark changes you make as yours.
60552 \begin_layout Section
60554 \begin_inset Index idx
60559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60561 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60576 \begin_inset Index idx
60581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60583 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60600 \begin_layout Subsection
60602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60604 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
60611 \begin_layout Description
60613 \begin_inset space ~
60617 \begin_inset space ~
60620 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
60622 You can find its actual translation status here:
60624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60626 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
60632 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
60636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60638 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
60639 LaTeX Language Support
60644 \begin_layout Description
60646 \begin_inset space ~
60649 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
60650 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
60651 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
60652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60668 The most widespread language package is
60673 \begin_inset Index idx
60678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60696 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
60698 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
60699 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
60700 come with the alternative language package
60705 \begin_inset Index idx
60710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60727 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
60729 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
60734 The available selections are described in section
60735 \begin_inset space ~
60739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60741 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
60749 \begin_layout Description
60751 \begin_inset space ~
60755 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
60756 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
60757 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
60759 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
60763 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
60767 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
60769 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
60773 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
60774 that is used to switch to a different language
60775 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
60776 to start the package
60780 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
60781 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
60785 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
60786 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
60789 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60802 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
60810 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
60813 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
60815 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60820 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60838 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60839 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60847 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60852 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60858 this setting is ignored.
60863 \begin_layout Description
60865 \begin_inset space ~
60869 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
60876 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
60877 Use this if the language switch set in
60881 needs to be explicitly ended,
60886 's alternative command
60890 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
60891 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60894 end{otherlanguage*}
60898 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60901 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60902 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60908 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60910 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60914 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60920 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60926 this setting is ignored.
60931 \begin_layout Description
60933 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60935 \begin_inset space ~
60939 \begin_inset space ~
60942 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60945 \begin_layout Description
60947 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60949 \begin_inset space ~
60953 \begin_inset space ~
60956 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60962 \begin_layout Description
60964 \begin_inset space ~
60968 \begin_inset space ~
60972 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60974 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60977 this option is set,
60978 the languages used in the document will be added
60979 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
60982 to the document class options
60983 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
60984 rather than the language package options.
60985 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
60990 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
60991 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
60993 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
60994 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
60996 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
61000 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
61001 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
61010 \begin_layout Description
61012 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
61014 \begin_inset space ~
61018 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
61020 \begin_inset space ~
61024 \begin_inset space ~
61028 \begin_inset space ~
61034 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
61036 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
61039 this option is set,
61041 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
61042 the language switch defined in
61045 \begin_inset space ~
61050 is output at the beginning of the document,
61051 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
61052 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
61053 This might be needed if you use a non-default
61056 \begin_inset space ~
61061 or if a package resets the document language.
61063 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
61064 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
61065 documents start with the chosen document language.
61066 When this option is not set,
61070 \begin_inset space ~
61075 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
61077 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
61080 \begin_inset space ~
61090 \begin_layout Description
61092 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
61094 \begin_inset space ~
61098 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
61100 \begin_inset space ~
61104 \begin_inset space ~
61108 \begin_inset space ~
61114 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
61118 \begin_inset space ~
61122 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
61123 Set document language explicitly
61129 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
61131 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
61138 \begin_inset space ~
61144 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
61146 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
61150 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
61152 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
61155 the end of the document.
61156 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
61160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61161 \paragraph_spacing single
61163 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
61169 \begin_layout Description
61171 \begin_inset space ~
61175 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
61177 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
61181 \begin_inset space ~
61185 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
61188 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
61190 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
61194 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
61197 in a language different
61198 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
61200 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
61203 the document language will be
61204 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
61205 marked (by default with a blue
61208 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
61210 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
61214 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
61218 \begin_layout Description
61220 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
61222 \begin_inset space ~
61226 \begin_inset space ~
61230 \begin_inset space ~
61235 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
61236 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
61237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61241 English and Hebrew:
61243 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
61249 \begin_layout Description
61251 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
61253 \begin_inset space ~
61257 \begin_inset space ~
61260 support Enables the use of languages,
61261 written from right to left (RTL),
61268 \begin_layout Description
61270 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
61272 \begin_inset space ~
61276 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
61278 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
61282 \begin_inset space ~
61286 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
61287 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
61288 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
61290 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
61294 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
61296 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
61297 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
61301 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61303 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
61307 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
61312 \begin_layout Standard
61317 means that the cursor
61318 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
61319 follows the logic of the text direction,
61320 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
61322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61326 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
61327 Hebrew embedded in English),
61328 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
61333 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
61334 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
61335 right arrow in this specific case always means:
61340 in text (even if this means:
61347 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61348 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
61349 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
61350 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
61351 since the cursor then follows a coherent
61352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61363 \begin_layout Standard
61365 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
61371 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
61373 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
61374 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
61379 ) when coming from the left.
61380 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
61381 at the expense of the text logic.
61382 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61383 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
61384 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
61389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61391 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
61395 \begin_layout Description
61397 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
61399 \begin_inset space ~
61403 \begin_inset space ~
61406 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
61408 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
61409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61415 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
61418 \begin_layout Description
61420 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
61422 \begin_inset space ~
61426 \begin_inset space ~
61429 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
61435 \begin_layout Subsection
61439 \begin_layout Standard
61440 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
61441 \begin_inset space ~
61445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61447 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
61455 \begin_layout Section
61459 \begin_layout Subsection
61461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61463 name "subsec:General-output"
61470 \begin_layout Description
61472 \begin_inset space ~
61475 search Commands that will be used for the menu
61477 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
61479 \begin_inset space ~
61485 For a detailed description see section
61487 Reverse DVI/PDF search
61492 \begin_inset space ~
61500 \begin_layout Description
61502 \begin_inset space ~
61505 Options Options for the program
61509 that is used for the export format
61515 \begin_inset space ~
61519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61521 reference "subsec:Export"
61527 Possible options are listed in the
61532 \begin_inset Newline newline
61536 \begin_inset Flex URL
61539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61541 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
61551 \begin_layout Description
61553 \begin_inset space ~
61557 \begin_inset space ~
61560 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
61562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
61563 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
61565 \begin_inset space ~
61571 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
61574 \begin_layout Description
61576 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
61578 \begin_inset space ~
61582 \begin_inset Index idx
61587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61594 \begin_inset Index idx
61599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61601 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61615 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
61616 \begin_inset Newline newline
61620 \begin_inset Flex URL
61623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61625 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
61631 \begin_inset Newline newline
61634 For example the format
61635 \begin_inset Newline newline
61639 \begin_inset Newline newline
61642 prints the date as day/month/year.
61647 \begin_layout Description
61649 \begin_inset space ~
61653 \begin_inset space ~
61656 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
61657 is allowed to overwrite on export.
61660 \begin_layout Subsection
61666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61668 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
61673 \begin_inset Index idx
61678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61680 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61698 \begin_layout Description
61700 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
61702 \begin_inset space ~
61710 \begin_inset space ~
61714 \begin_inset space ~
61717 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
61722 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
61746 are used for Cyrillic.
61747 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
61749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61762 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
61763 sets up in the background.
61764 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
61769 \begin_layout Description
61771 \begin_inset space ~
61775 \begin_inset space ~
61779 \begin_inset space ~
61783 \begin_inset space ~
61786 options They only have an effect when the program
61790 is used as DVI-viewer,
61791 read its manual to find out more.
61794 \begin_layout Standard
61795 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
61796 But before you change something,
61797 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
61800 \begin_layout Description
61802 \begin_inset space ~
61805 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
61807 \begin_inset space ~
61811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61813 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
61821 \begin_layout Description
61823 \begin_inset space ~
61826 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
61828 \begin_inset space ~
61832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61834 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
61842 \begin_layout Description
61844 \begin_inset space ~
61847 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
61849 \begin_inset space ~
61853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61855 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
61863 \begin_layout Description
61869 \begin_inset space ~
61872 command Command for the program
61874 Check\SpecialChar TeX
61877 that is described in the section
61879 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
61884 Additional Features
61889 \begin_layout Standard
61890 There are additionally the following options:
61893 \begin_layout Description
61895 \begin_inset space ~
61899 \begin_inset space ~
61903 \begin_inset space ~
61907 \begin_inset space ~
61912 \begin_inset space ~
61915 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61934 to separate folders.
61935 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61937 \begin_inset Index idx
61942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61949 \begin_inset Index idx
61954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61973 \begin_layout Description
61975 \begin_inset space ~
61979 \begin_inset space ~
61983 \begin_inset space ~
61987 \begin_inset space ~
61991 \begin_inset space ~
61995 \begin_inset space ~
61998 changes Removes all manually set
62004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
62005 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
62007 \begin_inset space ~
62012 dialog when changing the document class.
62015 \begin_layout Section
62017 \begin_inset space ~
62021 \begin_inset Index idx
62026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62035 \begin_layout Subsection
62037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62039 name "subsec:Converters"
62044 \begin_inset Index idx
62049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62058 \begin_layout Standard
62059 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
62060 You can modify converters or create new ones.
62061 To modify a converter,
62063 change the entry of the
62070 \begin_inset space ~
62075 field and press the
62080 To create a new converter,
62081 select an existing one,
62082 select a different format in the
62085 \begin_inset space ~
62095 field and press the
62102 \begin_layout Standard
62105 Converter File Cache
62112 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
62114 Maximum Age (in days
62117 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
62118 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
62121 \begin_layout Standard
62122 More about converters,
62123 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
62124 is described in the section
62135 \begin_layout Subsection
62137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62139 name "sec:File-Formats"
62144 \begin_inset Index idx
62149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62156 \begin_inset Index idx
62161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62170 \begin_layout Standard
62171 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
62181 programs that should be used for certain formats.
62184 \begin_layout Standard
62185 You can also define the
62187 Default output format
62189 that is used when you use
62193 View Master Document
62197 Update Master Document
62203 menu or the toolbar.
62206 \begin_layout Standard
62207 More about formats and their options is described in the section
62218 \begin_layout Standard
62219 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
62220 's temporary directory,
62221 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
62222 This is done by specifying a
62227 More about this is described in the section
62238 \begin_layout Chapter
62239 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
62241 \begin_inset Index idx
62246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62255 name "chap:Units-available-in"
62262 \begin_layout Standard
62264 \begin_inset space ~
62268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
62270 reference "tab:Units"
62275 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
62276 and used in this documentation.
62279 \begin_layout Standard
62280 \begin_inset Float table
62287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62288 \begin_inset Caption Standard
62290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
62305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62306 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
62312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62314 \begin_inset Tabular
62315 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
62316 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
62317 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
62318 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
62319 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
62321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62472 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
62476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62743 scaled point (65536
62744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62811 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
62816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62935 % of original image width
62940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
63003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63024 \begin_layout Standard
63025 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63028 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
63035 \begin_layout Bibliography
63036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63037 LatexCommand bibitem
63044 The \SpecialChar LyX
63047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63050 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
63056 \begin_inset Newline newline
63060 \begin_inset Flex URL
63063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63065 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
63073 \begin_layout Bibliography
63074 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63075 LatexCommand bibitem
63076 key "latexcompanion"
63081 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
63084 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
63085 Companion Second Edition.
63092 \begin_layout Bibliography
63093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63094 LatexCommand bibitem
63100 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
63104 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
63112 \begin_layout Bibliography
63113 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63114 LatexCommand bibitem
63125 A Document Preparation System.
63133 \begin_layout Bibliography
63134 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63135 LatexCommand bibitem
63145 The \SpecialChar TeX
63153 \begin_layout Bibliography
63154 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63155 LatexCommand bibitem
63161 The \SpecialChar TeX
63163 \begin_inset Newline newline
63167 \begin_inset Flex URL
63170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63172 https://ctan.org/topic
63180 \begin_layout Bibliography
63181 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63182 LatexCommand bibitem
63188 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
63190 \begin_inset Newline newline
63194 \begin_inset Flex URL
63197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63199 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
63207 \begin_layout Bibliography
63208 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63209 LatexCommand bibitem
63216 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63218 name "Documentation"
63219 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
63226 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63230 \begin_inset Newline newline
63234 \begin_inset Flex URL
63237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63239 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
63247 \begin_layout Bibliography
63248 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63249 LatexCommand bibitem
63256 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63258 name "Documentation"
63259 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
63264 how to use the program
63266 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63270 \begin_inset Newline newline
63274 \begin_inset Flex URL
63277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63279 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
63287 \begin_layout Bibliography
63288 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63289 LatexCommand bibitem
63296 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63298 name "Documentation"
63299 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
63304 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63310 \begin_inset Index idx
63315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63318 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63333 \begin_inset Newline newline
63337 \begin_inset Flex URL
63340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63342 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
63350 \begin_layout Bibliography
63351 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63352 LatexCommand bibitem
63359 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63361 name "Documentation"
63362 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
63367 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63373 \begin_inset Index idx
63378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63381 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63396 \begin_inset Newline newline
63400 \begin_inset Flex URL
63403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63405 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
63413 \begin_layout Bibliography
63414 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63415 LatexCommand bibitem
63422 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63424 name "Documentation"
63425 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
63435 \begin_inset Newline newline
63439 \begin_inset Flex URL
63442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63444 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
63452 \begin_layout Bibliography
63453 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63454 LatexCommand bibitem
63455 key "makeindex-man"
63461 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63464 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
63474 \begin_inset Newline newline
63478 \begin_inset Flex URL
63481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63483 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
63489 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
63493 \begin_layout Bibliography
63495 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
63496 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63497 LatexCommand bibitem
63504 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63506 name "Documentation"
63507 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
63517 \begin_inset Newline newline
63521 \begin_inset Flex URL
63524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63526 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
63528 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
63540 \begin_layout Bibliography
63541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63542 LatexCommand bibitem
63549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63551 name "Documentation"
63552 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
63562 \begin_inset Newline newline
63566 \begin_inset Flex URL
63569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63571 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
63579 \begin_layout Bibliography
63580 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63581 LatexCommand bibitem
63588 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63590 name "Documentation"
63591 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
63596 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
63598 \begin_inset Newline newline
63602 \begin_inset Flex URL
63605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63607 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
63615 \begin_layout Bibliography
63616 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63617 LatexCommand bibitem
63624 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63626 name "Documentation"
63627 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
63632 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63638 \begin_inset Index idx
63643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63646 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63661 \begin_inset Newline newline
63665 \begin_inset Flex URL
63668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63670 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
63678 \begin_layout Bibliography
63679 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63680 LatexCommand bibitem
63687 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63689 name "Documentation"
63690 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
63695 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63701 \begin_inset Index idx
63706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63709 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63724 \begin_inset Newline newline
63728 \begin_inset Flex URL
63731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63733 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
63741 \begin_layout Bibliography
63742 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63743 LatexCommand bibitem
63750 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63752 name "Documentation"
63753 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
63758 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63764 \begin_inset Index idx
63769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63772 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63787 \begin_inset Newline newline
63791 \begin_inset Flex URL
63794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63796 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
63804 \begin_layout Bibliography
63805 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63806 LatexCommand bibitem
63813 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63815 name "Documentation"
63816 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
63821 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63827 \begin_inset Index idx
63832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63850 \begin_inset Newline newline
63854 \begin_inset Flex URL
63857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63859 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
63867 \begin_layout Bibliography
63868 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63869 LatexCommand bibitem
63876 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63878 name "Documentation"
63879 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
63884 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63890 \begin_inset Index idx
63895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63898 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63913 \begin_inset Newline newline
63917 \begin_inset Flex URL
63920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63922 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63930 \begin_layout Bibliography
63931 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63932 LatexCommand bibitem
63939 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63941 name "Documentation"
63942 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63947 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63953 \begin_inset Index idx
63958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63961 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63976 \begin_inset Newline newline
63980 \begin_inset Flex URL
63983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63985 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
63993 \begin_layout Bibliography
63994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63995 LatexCommand bibitem
64002 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64004 name "Documentation"
64005 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
64010 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
64016 \begin_inset Index idx
64021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
64027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64039 \begin_inset Newline newline
64043 \begin_inset Flex URL
64046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64048 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
64056 \begin_layout Bibliography
64057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64058 LatexCommand bibitem
64065 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64067 name "Documentation"
64068 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
64073 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
64079 \begin_inset Index idx
64084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
64090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64102 \begin_inset Newline newline
64106 \begin_inset Flex URL
64109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64111 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
64119 \begin_layout Bibliography
64120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64121 LatexCommand bibitem
64128 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64131 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
64136 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64138 \begin_inset Newline newline
64142 \begin_inset Flex URL
64145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64147 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
64155 \begin_layout Bibliography
64156 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64157 LatexCommand bibitem
64164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64167 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
64172 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64174 \begin_inset Newline newline
64178 \begin_inset Flex URL
64181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64183 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
64191 \begin_layout Bibliography
64192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64193 LatexCommand bibitem
64200 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64203 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
64208 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64209 for Cyrillic languages:
64210 \begin_inset Newline newline
64214 \begin_inset Flex URL
64217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64219 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
64227 \begin_layout Bibliography
64228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64229 LatexCommand bibitem
64236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64239 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
64244 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64246 \begin_inset Newline newline
64250 \begin_inset Flex URL
64253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64255 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
64263 \begin_layout Bibliography
64264 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64265 LatexCommand bibitem
64272 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64275 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
64280 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64282 \begin_inset Newline newline
64286 \begin_inset Flex URL
64289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64291 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
64299 \begin_layout Bibliography
64300 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
64301 LatexCommand bibitem
64308 \begin_inset CommandInset href
64311 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
64316 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
64318 \begin_inset Newline newline
64322 \begin_inset Flex URL
64325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64327 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
64335 \begin_layout Standard
64336 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
64343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64371 \begin_inset Note Note
64374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64381 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
64382 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
64390 \begin_layout Standard
64391 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
64392 LatexCommand bibtex
64393 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
64394 options "biblio/alphadin"
64401 \begin_layout Standard
64402 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
64406 \begin_layout Standard
64410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64416 pagedeclaration}[1]{
64419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64426 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
64434 \begin_inset Note Note
64437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64438 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
64440 \begin_inset space ~
64444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
64446 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
64459 \begin_layout Standard
64460 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
64461 LatexCommand printnomenclature
64467 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
64468 LatexCommand printindex